bid documents · 211300 fire sprinkler systems 1-14. division 22 plumbing . 220517 sleeves &...

BID DOCUMENTS

15.NOV.13

New Cafeteria Building at the

Sierra Nevada Job Corps Center (SNJCC), Stead Complex Reno, Nevada

For the U.S. Department of Labor

SPECIFICATIONSvolume three

+

SNJCC New Cafeteria & Demolition of Existing Cafeteria

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section Title Number of Pages ______________VOLUME 1____________________ DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 Summary 1-6 011500 Geotechnical Investigation 1-38 012500 Substitution Procedures 1-4 013100 Project Management and Coordination 1-10 013200 Construction Progress Documentation 1-12 013233 Photographic Documentation 1-3 013300 Submittal Procedures 1-10 014000 Quality Control & Testing and Inspection Services 1-11 014200 References 1-9 015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls 1-10 015719.11 Indoor Air Quality Management 1-6 016000 Product Requirements 1-4 017300 Execution 1-11 017419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal 1-9 017700 Closeout Procedures 1-7 017823 Operation and Maintenance Data 1-9 017839 Project Record Documents 1-5 017900 Demonstration and Training 1-6 018113.13 Sustainable Design Requirements – LEED 1-11 LEED Project Checklist (for information only) 1-4 019113 General Commissioning Requirements 1-20 019114 Commissioning Authority Responsibilities 1-16 DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS 024114 Over-excavation and Disposal of Buried Tanks and Hydrocarbon Contaminated Soils 1-3 024116 Structure Demolition (including photos) 1-64 028000 Hazardous Materials Abatement 1-104 028200 Asbestos Abatement 1-12 028233.13 Removal of Lead-Based Paint 1-14 028416 Handling of Lighting Ballasts Containing PCB’s 1-7 DIVISION 03 CONCRETE 033000 Cast-in-Place Concrete 1-28 039200 Concrete Polishing 1-4

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1 of 6


DIVISION 04 MASONRY 042200 Concrete Unit Masonry Assemblies 1-15 DIVISION 05 METALS 051200 Structural Steel Framing 1-11 054000 Cold Formed Metal Framing 1-9 055000 Metal Fabrications 1-10 055213 Pipe and Tube Railings 1-10 DIVISION 06 WOOD AND PLASTICS 061000 Rough Carpentry 1-7 061800 Glue-Laminated Construction 1-6 064116 Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets 1-10 066400 Fiber Reinforced Plastic Paneling 1-4 DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 071326 Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing 1-6 071900 Water Repellents 1-5 072100 Thermal Insulation 1-5 074213.19 Insulated Metal Wall Panels 1-12 074213.53 Metal Soffit Panels 1-9 075419 Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Roofing 1-15 076100 Sheet Metal Roofing 1-16 076200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 1-9 077200 Roof Accessories 1-7 078413 Penetration Firestopping 1-7 079200 Joint Sealants 1-10

_______________VOLUME 2__________________________ DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS 081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 1-12 081250 Interior Aluminum Door & Window Frames 1-5 081416 Flush Wood Doors 1-8 083113 Access Doors and Frames 1-4 083326 Overhead Coiling Grilles 1-9 084113 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 1-15 084413 Glazed Aluminum Curtainwalls 1-9 086223 Tubular Skylights 1-6 087100 Door Hardware 1-16 088000 Glazing 1-11 089119 Fixed Louvers 1-6



DIVISION 9 FINISHES 092216 Non-Structural Metal Framing 1-6 092900 Gypsum Board 1-9 093000 Tiling 1-9 095113 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 1-9 095126 Wood Panel Ceilings 1-5 096513 Resilient Base and Accessories 1-4 099113 Exterior Painting 1-8 099123 Interior Painting 1-9 099650 Resinous Floor Coating 1-4 DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES 101400 Signage 1-5 102113 Toilet Compartments 1-5 102600 Wall and Door Protection 1-7 102800 Toilet Bath and Laundry Accessories 1-6 104413 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets 1-6 104416 Fire Extinguishers 1-3 105113 Metal Lockers 1-7 DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT 113000 Loading Dock Equipment 1-4 114000 Food Service Equipment 1-52 DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS 124813 Entrance Floor Mats and Frames 1-5 129300 Site Furnishings 1-5 DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION 211300 Fire Sprinkler Systems 1-14 DIVISION 22 PLUMBING 220517 Sleeves & Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping 1-5 220518 Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping 1-2 220519 Meters and Gauges for Plumbing Piping 1-6 220523 General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping 1-9 220529 Hangers & Supports for Plumbing Piping/Equip. 1-10 220548 Vibration & Seismic Controls for Piping/Equip. 1-14 220553 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 1-5 220719 Plumbing Piping Insulation 1-18



221116 Domestic Water Piping 1-8 221119 Domestic Water Piping Specialties 1-13 221123 Domestic Water Pumps 1-5 221316 Sanitary Waste & Vent Piping 1-8 221319 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties 1-7 221323 Sanitary Waste Interceptors 1-4 223400 Fuel Fired, Domestic Water Heaters 1-7 224213.13 Commercial Water Closets 1-5 224213.16 Commercial Urinals 1-4 224216.13 Commercial Lavatories 1-6 224216.16 Commercial Sinks 1-6 224716 Pressure Water Coolers 1-4 DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR

CONDITIONING 230513 Common Motor Req’ts for HVAC Equipment 1-3 230517 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping 1-5 230518 Escutcheons for HVAC Piping 1-2 230519 Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping 1-7 230523 General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping 1-16 230529 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping & Equip. 1-11 230548 Vibration & Seismic Controls for HVAC 1-14 230553 Identification for HVAC Piping & Equipment 1-6 230593 Testing, Adjusting & Balancing for HVAC 1-14 230713 Duct Insulation 1-17 230719 HVAC Piping Insulation 1-15 230800 Commissioning of HVAC 1-4 230900 Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 1-19 231123 Facility Natural-Gas Piping 1-13 232113 Hydronic Piping 1-13 232116 Hydronic Piping Specialties 1-7 232123 Hydronic Pumps 1-5 232300 Refrigerant Piping 1-10 232500 HVAC Water Treatment 1-10 233113 Metal Ducts 1-19 233300 Air Duct Accessories 1-13 233423 HVAC Power Ventilators 1-8 233713 Diffusers, Registers & Grilles 1-6 233723 HVAC Gravity Ventilators 1-5 233813 Commercial Kitchen Hoods 1-10 235100 Breechings, Chimneys and Stacks 1-5 235216 Condensing Boilers 1-8 236313 Air-Cooled Refrigerant Condensers 1-6 237313 Modular Indoor Central Station Air Handling Units 1-13 237333.16 Packaged, Indirect-Fired, Indoor & Outdoor

Heating and Cooling Make-Up Air Units 1-13 238126 Split System Air Conditioners 1-6 238239.19 Wall and Ceiling Unit Heaters 1-3 238316 Radiant Heating Hydronic Piping 1-6



_______________VOLUME 3__________________________ DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL 260513 Medium-Voltage Cables 1-7 260519 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 1-5 260526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 1-7 260529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 1-6 260533 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 1-13 260543 Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems 1-12 260544 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways And Cabling 1-4 260548.16 Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems 1-7 260553 Identification for Electrical Systems 1-8 260923 Lighting Control Devices 1-10 261200 Medium Voltage Transformers 1-8 262413 Switchboards 1-9 262416 Panelboards 1-8 262713 Electricity Metering 1-4 262726 Wiring Devices 1-7 262813 Fuses 1-4 262816 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 1-6 262913 Enclosed Controllers 1-10 264313 Surge Protection Devices for Low Voltage Electrical Power Circuits 1-5 265100 Interior Lighting 1-10 265600 Exterior Lighting 1-11 DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280513 Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security 1-7 283111 Digital, Addressable Fire Alarm System 1-18 DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK 311000 Site Clearing 1-6 312000 Earth Moving 1-15 312005 Trenching 1-6 DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 321216 Asphalt Paving 1-8 321313 Concrete Paving 1-17 323113 Chain Link Fences and Gates 1-6 328400 Landscape Irrigation 1-10 329000 Planting 1-14



DIVISION 33 UTILITIES 330523.16 Jacking, Augering and Mining 1-6 331100 Water Distribution Piping 1-4 331200 Water Valves and Appurtenances 1-8 333000 Sanitary Sewer Utility Piping 1-4 334100 Storm Utility Drainage Piping 1-8 334416 Utility Trench Drains 1-3 335100 Natural Gas Distribution Piping 1-5 335101 Gas Valves and Appurtenances 1-5 END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS



SECTION 260513 - MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cables and related cable splices, terminations, and accessories for medium-voltage (2001 to 35,000 V) electrical distribution systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Jacket: A continuous nonmetallic outer covering for conductors or cables.

B. NETA ATS: Acceptance Testing Specification.

C. Sheath: A continuous metallic covering for conductors or cables.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of cable. Include splices and terminations for cables and cable accessories.

B. Samples: 16-inch lengths for each type of cable specified.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Material Certificates: For each type of cable and accessory.

C. Source quality-control reports.

D. Field quality-control reports.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer: Engage a cable splicer, trained and certified by splice material manufacturer, to install, splice, and terminate medium-voltage cable.

MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES 260513 - 1


B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than five days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Construction Manager’s written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Cables:

a. Aetna Insulated Wire, Inc.; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. General Cable Technologies Corporation. c. Kerite; a Marmon Wire & Cable/Berkshire Hathaway company. d. Okonite Company (The). e. Prysmian Cables & Systems. f. Southwire Company.

2. Cable Splicing and Terminating Products and Accessories:

a. Adalet; a Scott Fetzer company. b. DSG-Canusa; a Shawcor company. c. Engineered Products Company. d. G&W Electric Company. e. MP Husky. f. RTE Components; Cooper Power Systems, Inc. g. Thomas & Betts Corporation. h. Thomas & Betts Corporation/Elastimold. i. 3M; Electrical Markets Division. j. Tyco Electronics; Raychem Products.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain cables and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.


http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=1693&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456836318&mf=04&src=wd


















2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with IEEE C2 and NFPA 70.

2.3 CABLES

A. Cable Type: Type MV 105.

B. Comply with UL 1072, AEIC CS8, ICEA S-93-639/NEMA WC 74, and ICEA S-97-682.

C. Conductor: Copper.

D. Conductor Stranding: Compact round, concentric lay, Class B.

E. Strand Filling: Conductor interstices are filled with impermeable compound.

F. Conductor Insulation: Ethylene-propylene rubber.

1. Voltage Rating: 25 kV. 2. Insulation Thickness: 100 percent insulation level.

G. Shielding: Copper tape, helically applied over semiconducting insulation shield.

H. Shielding and Jacket: Corrugated copper drain wires embedded in extruded, chlorinated, polyethylene jacket.

I. Three-Conductor Cable Assembly: Three insulated, shielded conductors cabled together with ground conductors.

1. Circuit Identification: Color-coded tape (black, red, blue) under the metallic shielding.

J. Cable Sheath: Interlocked aluminum applied over cable.

K. Cable Jacket: Sunlight-resistant PVC.

2.4 CONNECTORS

A. Copper-Conductor Connectors: Copper barrel crimped connectors.

2.5 SOLID TERMINATIONS

A. Multiconductor Cable Sheath Seals: Type recommended by seal manufacturer for type of cable and installation conditions, including orientation.

1. Heat-shrink sheath seal kit with phase- and ground-conductor rejacketing tubes, cable-end sealing boot, and sealing plugs for unused ground-wire openings in boot.



B. Shielded-Cable Terminations: Comply with the following classes of IEEE 48. Insulation class shall be equivalent to that of cable. Include shield ground strap for shielded cable terminations.

1. Class 1 Terminations: Heat-shrink type with heat-shrink inner stress control and outer nontracking tubes; multiple, molded, nontracking skirt modules; and compression-type connector.

2.6 SEPARABLE INSULATED CONNECTORS

A. Description: Modular system, complying with IEEE 386, with disconnecting, single-pole, cable terminators and with matching, stationary, plug-in, dead-front terminals designed for cable voltage and for sealing against moisture.

B. Terminations at Distribution Points: Modular type, consisting of terminators installed on cables and modular, dead-front, terminal junctions for interconnecting cables.

C. Load-Break Cable Terminators: Elbow-type units with 200-A-load make/break and continuous-current rating; coordinated with insulation diameter, conductor size, and material of cable being terminated. Include test point on terminator body that is capacitance coupled.

D. Test-Point Fault Indicators: Applicable current-trip ratings and arranged for installation in test points of load-break separable connectors, and complete with self-resetting indicators capable of being installed with shotgun hot stick and tested with test tool.

E. Tool Set: Shotgun hot stick with energized terminal indicator, fault-indicator test tool, and carrying case.

2.7 SPLICE KITS

A. Splice Kits: Comply with IEEE 404; type as recommended by cable or splicing kit manufacturer for the application.

B. Splicing Products: As recommended, in writing, by splicing kit manufacturer for specific sizes, materials, ratings, and configurations of cable conductors. Include all components required for complete splice, with detailed instructions.

1. Heat-shrink splicing kit of uniform, cross-section, polymeric construction with outer heat-shrink jacket.

2. Premolded, EPDM splicing body kit with cable joint sealed by interference fit of mating parts and cable.

2.8 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TAPES

A. Ethylene/propylene rubber-based, 30-mil splicing tape, rated for 130 deg C operation. Minimum 3/4 inch wide.



2.9 ARC-PROOFING MATERIALS

A. Arc-Proofing Tape: Fireproof tape, flexible, conformable, intumescent to 0.3 inch thick, and compatible with cable jacket.

2.10 FAULT INDICATORS

A. Indicators: Automatically reset fault indicator with inrush restraint feature, arranged to clamp to cable sheath and provide a display after a fault has occurred in cable. Instrument shall not be affected by heat, moisture, and corrosive conditions and shall be recommended by manufacturer for installation conditions.

B. Resetting Tool: Designed for use with fault indicators, with moisture-resistant storage and carrying case.

2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test and inspect cables according to ICEA S-97-682 before shipping.

B. Test strand-filled cables for water-penetration resistance according to ICEA T-31-610, using a test pressure of 5 psig.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install cables according to IEEE 576.

B. Proof conduits prior to conductor installation by passing a wire brush mandrel and then a rubber duct swab through the conduit. Separate the wire brush and the rubber swab by 48 to 72 inches on the pull rope.

1. Wire Brush Mandrel: Consists of a length of brush approximately the size of the conduit inner diameter with stiff steel bristles and an eye on each end for attaching the pull ropes. If an obstruction is felt, pull the brush back and forth repeatedly to break up the obstruction.

2. Rubber Duct Swab: Consists of a series of rubber discs approximately the size of the conduit inner diameter on a length of steel cable with an eye on each end for attaching the pull ropes. Pull the rubber duct swab through the duct to extract loose debris from the duct.

C. Pull Conductors: Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

1. Where necessary, use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant that does not deteriorate conductor or insulation.

2. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave cable grips, that do not damage cables and raceways. Do not use rope hitches for pulling attachment to cable.



3. Use pull-in guides, cable feeders, and draw-in protectors as required to protect cables during installation.

4. Do not pull cables with ends unsealed. Seal cable ends with rubber tape.

D. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

E. Install "buried-cable" warning tape 12 inches above cables.

F. In manholes, handholes, pull boxes, junction boxes, and cable vaults, train cables around walls by the longest route from entry to exit; support cables at intervals adequate to prevent sag.

G. Install sufficient cable length to remove cable ends under pulling grips. Remove length of conductor damaged during pulling.

H. Install cable splices at pull points and elsewhere as indicated; use standard kits. Use dead-front separable watertight connectors in manholes and other locations subject to water infiltration.

I. Install terminations at ends of conductors, and seal multiconductor cable ends with standard kits.

J. Install separable insulated-connector components as follows:

1. Protective Cap: At each terminal junction, with one on each terminal to which no feeder is indicated to be connected.

2. Portable Feed-Through Accessory: At each terminal junction, with one on each terminal. 3. Standoff Insulator: At each terminal junction, with one on each terminal.

K. Arc Proofing: Unless otherwise indicated, arc proof medium-voltage cable at locations not protected by conduit, cable tray, direct burial, or termination materials. In addition to arc-proofing tape manufacturer's written instructions, apply arc proofing as follows:

1. Clean cable sheath. 2. Wrap metallic cable components with 10-mil pipe-wrapping tape. 3. Smooth surface contours with electrical insulation putty. 4. Apply arc-proofing tape in one half-lapped layer with coated side toward cable. 5. Band arc-proofing tape with two layers of 1-inch- wide half-lapped, adhesive, glass-cloth

tape at each end of the arc-proof tape.

L. Install fault indicators on each phase where indicated.

M. Ground shields of shielded cable at terminations, splices, and separable insulated connectors. Ground metal bodies of terminators, splices, cable and separable insulated-connector fittings, and hardware.

N. Identify cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." Identify phase and circuit number of each conductor at each splice, termination, pull point, and junction box. Arrange identification so that it is unnecessary to move the cable or conductor to read the identification.



3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. After installing medium-voltage cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

3. Perform direct-current High Potential test of each new conductor according to NETA ATS, Ch. 7.3.3. Do not exceed cable manufacturer's recommended maximum test voltage.

4. Perform Partial Discharge test of each new conductor according to NETA ATS, Ch. 7.3.3 and to test equipment manufacturer's recommendations.

5. Perform Dissipation Factor test of each new conductor according to NETA ATS, Ch. 7.3.3 and to test equipment manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Medium-voltage cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

END OF SECTION 260513



SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 260513 "Medium-Voltage Cables" for single-conductor and multiconductor cables, cable splices, and terminations for electrical distribution systems with 2001 to 35,000 V.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.


A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.


LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division. 2. Alpha Wire. 3. Belden Inc. 4. Encore Wire Corporation. 5. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 6. Southwire Incorporated.

B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.

C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THHN-2-THWN-2 and Type SO.

D. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type SO with ground wire.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Gardner Bender. 3. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 4. Ideal Industries, Inc. 5. Ilsco; a branch of Bardes Corporation. 6. NSi Industries LLC. 7. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of the EGS Electrical Group. 8. 3M; Electrical Markets Division. 9. Tyco Electronics.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.



B. Comply with NFPA 70.


















PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

B. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

C. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

D. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

E. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables.

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

E. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.



B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor.

3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements.

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

3. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in conductors No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner. Correct deficiencies determined during the scan.

a. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

b. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

c. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.



B. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Procedures used. 2. Results that comply with requirements. 3. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.

C. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.




SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.

B. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment, plus the following special applications:

1. Underground distribution grounding. 2. Foundation steel electrodes.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.


A. As-Built Data: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:

1. Ground rods.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor.

C. Field quality-control reports.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

a. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at grounding connections for separately derived systems based on NETA MTS and NFPA 70B.

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 1


1) Tests shall determine if ground-resistance or impedance values remain within specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective action if values do not.

2) Include recommended testing intervals.




B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems. 2. Dossert; AFL Telecommunications LLC. 3. ERICO International Corporation. 4. Fushi Copperweld Inc. 5. Galvan Industries, Inc.; Electrical Products Division, LLC. 6. Harger Lightning and Grounding. 7. ILSCO. 8. O-Z/Gedney; A Brand of the EGS Electrical Group. 9. Robbins Lightning, Inc. 10. Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc.



B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

2.3 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:













1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8

inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

C. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches in cross section, with 9/32-inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inches apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V and shall be Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V.

2.4 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

D. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

2.5 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel, sectional type; 3/4 inch by 10 feet.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Grounding Bus: Install in telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Install bus horizontally, on insulated spacers 2 inches minimum from wall, 6 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

C. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.



2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise indicated.

3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE

A. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be connected to the ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses.

3.3 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.

B. Grounding Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through manhole or handhole floor, close to wall, and set rod depth so 4 inches will extend above finished floor. If necessary, install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned-copper conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive insulating tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches above to 6 inches below concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, nonshrink grout.

C. Grounding Connections to Manhole Components: Bond exposed-metal parts such as inserts, cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded, hard-drawn copper bonding conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields according to written instructions by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits.

D. Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install two ground rods and ground ring around the pad. Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items associated with substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes. Install tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for ground ring and for taps to equipment grounding terminals. Bury ground ring not less than 6 inches (150 mm) from the foundation.

3.4 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70:

1. Flexible raceway runs.

B. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping.



C. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.

D. Metallic Fences: Comply with requirements of IEEE C2.

1. Grounding Conductor: Bare copper, not less than No. 8 AWG. 2. Gates: Shall be bonded to the grounding conductor with a flexible bonding jumper. 3. Barbed Wire: Strands shall be bonded to the grounding conductor.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade unless otherwise indicated.

1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any.

C. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole. Handholes are specified in Section 260543 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems," and shall be at least 12 inches deep, with cover.

1. Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service unless otherwise indicated. Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush with finished grade or floor.

D. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.

E. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.



2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve.

F. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.

G. Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode (Ufer Ground): Fabricate according to NFPA 70; using electrically conductive coated steel reinforcing bars or rods, at least 20 feet (6.0 m) long. If reinforcing is in multiple pieces, connect together by the usual steel tie wires or exothermic welding to create the required length.



B. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test wells, and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.

a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

4. Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground-rod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.

C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


E. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms. 2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms.



3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms. 4. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 3 ohm(s). 5. Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms. 6. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms.

F. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.




SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for products and installation requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 1



A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Steel slotted support systems. 2. Nonmetallic slotted support systems.

B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:

1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Equipment supports.


A. Welding certificates.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified together with concrete Specifications.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Section 077200 "Roof Accessories."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc. c. ERICO International Corporation.


http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456895789&mf=&src=wd




d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Atkore International. g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4.

4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4.

5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Hilti, Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.












2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti, Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where it’s Table 1 lists maximum spacings less than stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps.

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.







B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69. 7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 2 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.

B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."



C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.




SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 4. Nonmetal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 5. Surface raceways. 6. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 7. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.


1. Section 260543 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" for exterior ductbanks, manholes, and underground utility construction.

2. Section 280528 "Pathways for Electronic Safety and Security" for conduits, surface pathways, innerduct, boxes, and faceplate adapters serving electronic safety and security.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.

D. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

E. PVC: Poly-vinyl chloride conduit.

F. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

G. LFMC: Liquid tight flexible metal conduit.

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1



A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For solvent cements and adhesive primers, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For solvent cements and adhesive primers, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

C. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.


A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosures, cabinets, and conduit racks and their mounting provisions, including those for internal components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

4. Detailed description of conduit support devices and interconnections on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit. 3. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 4. Electri-Flex Company. 5. O-Z/Gedney. 6. Picoma Industries.


http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=1747&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=&src=wd








7. Republic Conduit. 8. Robroy Industries. 9. Southwire Company. 10. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 11. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 12. Wheatland Tube Company.

B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

D. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.

E. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit or IMC.

1. Comply with NEMA RN 1. 2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.

F. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

G. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel or aluminum.

H. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

I. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70.

2. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel or die cast. b. Type: Setscrew or compression.

3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.

4. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

J. Joint Compound for IMC or GRC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.












3. Arnco Corporation. 4. CANTEX Inc. 5. CertainTeed Corporation. 6. Condux International, Inc. 7. Electri-Flex Company. 8. Kraloy. 9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 10. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc. 11. RACO; Hubbell. 12. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated.

D. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660.

E. Fittings for RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

F. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B.

G. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS


1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman. 3. Mono-Systems, Inc. 4. Square D.

B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1or Type 3R unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.

1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type unless otherwise indicated.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.












http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=1749&mf=04&mf=95&src=wdhttp://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=1749&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=&src=wd






2.4 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Mono-Systems, Inc. b. Panduit Corp. c. Wiremold / Legrand.

2.5 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS


1. Adalet. 2. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds. 3. EGS/Appleton Electric. 4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 5. FSR Inc. 6. Hoffman. 7. Hubbell Incorporated. 8. Kraloy. 9. Milbank Manufacturing Co. 10. Mono-Systems, Inc. 11. O-Z/Gedney. 12. RACO; Hubbell. 13. Robroy Industries. 14. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 15. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures. 16. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 17. Wiremold / Legrand.

B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

E. Metal Floor Boxes:

1. Material: Cast metal. 2. Type: Fully adjustable.

























3. Shape: Rectangular. 4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

F. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb. Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight.

G. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

H. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.

I. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.

J. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep.

K. Gangable boxes are allowed.

L. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 and Type 3R with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

M. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

2.6 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING

A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes:

1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application.

2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a combination of the two.




a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. c. NewBasis. d. Oldcastle Precast, Inc. e. Quazite: Hubbell Power System, Inc. f. Synertech Moulded Products.

2. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77. 3. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with open bottom unless otherwise indicated. 4. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural

load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location. 5. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 6. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC." 7. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts

for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. 8. Handholes 12 Inches Wide by 24 Inches Long and Larger: Have inserts for cable racks

and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.

2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES

A. Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied.

1. Tests of materials shall be performed by an independent testing agency. 2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing

agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer.

3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012 and traceable to NIST standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: GRC. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC, IMC, or EMT. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC or LFNC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC.









3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Raceway locations include the following:

a. Loading dock. b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units. c. Mechanical rooms.

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

6. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC. 7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless

steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.

3. EMT: Use setscrew or compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with

NEMA FB 2.20.

E. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.

F. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.



F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

H. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.

I. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals.

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.

3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 1 inch of concrete cover in all directions. 4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for

each specific location. 5. Change from RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC to GRC before rising above floor.

J. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:

1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or

in an enclosure.

K. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

L. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly.

M. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

N. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.

O. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

P. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.

Q. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.



R. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.

S. Surface Raceways:

1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points. 2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not

exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.

T. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

U. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.

2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

V. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.

W. Expansion-Joint Fittings:

1. Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet.

2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations:

a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change. c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F

temperature change.

3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits.

4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints.

5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.



X. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

Y. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.

Z. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

AA. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.

BB. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.

CC. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

DD. Fasten junction and pull boxes to support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.

EE. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter.

2. Install backfill as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end

of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout length of elbow.

5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows, PVC coated or wrapped with 30-mil tape, for stub-ups at poles and equipment and through concrete floor or pad.

a. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit, PVC coated or wrapped with



30-mil tape, horizontally a minimum of 24 inches from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

6. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade.

D. Install handholes with bottom below frost line.

E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure.

F. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.

3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.



SECTION 260543 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Direct-buried conduit, ducts, and duct accessories. 2. Concrete-encased conduit, ducts, and duct accessories. 3. Handholes and boxes. 4. Manholes.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Trafficways: Locations where vehicular or pedestrian traffic is a normal course of events.



1. Include duct-bank materials, including separators and miscellaneous components. 2. Include ducts and conduits and their accessories, including elbows, end bells, bends,

fittings, and solvent cement. 3. Include accessories for manholes, handholes, boxes. 4. Include warning tape.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Precast or Factory-Fabricated Underground Utility Structures:

a. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, attachments to other work, and accessories.

b. Include duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. c. Include reinforcement details. d. Include frame and cover design and manhole frame support rings. e. Include grounding details. f. Include dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, pulling-in and lifting irons,

and sumps. g. Include joint details.

UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260543 - 1


2. Factory-Fabricated Handholes and Boxes Other Than Precast Concrete:

a. Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations, and fabrication and installation details.

b. Include duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. c. Include cover design. d. Include grounding details. e. Include dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, and pulling-in and lifting

irons.


A. Product Certificates: For concrete and steel used in precast concrete manholes and handholes, as required by ASTM C 858.

B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency responsible for testing nonconcrete handholes and boxes.



1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

B. Furnish cable-support stanchions, arms, insulators, and associated fasteners in quantities equal to 5 percent of quantity of each item installed.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.


A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions, and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than five days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Construction Manager's written permission.

B. Ground Water: Assume ground-water level is below ground surface unless a higher water table is noted on Drawings. All dewatering operations will be performed by contractor as required for installations. Refer to geotechnical report for subsurface conditions.



1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace underground ducts and raceways parts and products that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

B. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DUCTS AND RACEWAYS

A. Comply with ANSI C2.

2.2 CONDUIT

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Galvanized. Comply with ANSI C80.1.

B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, UL 651, with matching fittings by same manufacturer as the conduit, complying with NEMA TC 3 and UL 514B.

2.3 NONMETALLIC DUCTS AND DUCT ACCESSORIES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following:

1. ARNCO Corp. 2. Beck Manufacturing. 3. Cantex, Inc. 4. CertainTeed Corporation. 5. Condux International, Inc. 6. ElecSys, Inc. 7. Electri-Flex Company. 8. IPEX Inc. 9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 10. Spiraduct/AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

B. Underground Plastic Utilities Duct: NEMA TC 2, UL 651, ASTM F 512, Type EPC-40, with matching fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 by same manufacturer as the duct.

C. Duct Accessories:

1. Duct Separators: Factory-fabricated rigid PVC interlocking spacers, sized for type and size of ducts with which used, and selected to provide minimum duct spacing indicated while supporting ducts during concreting or backfilling.

2. Warning Tape: Underground-line warning tape specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."













2.4 HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes: Comply with SCTE 77. Comply with tier requirements in "Underground Enclosure Application" Article.

1. Color: Gray. 2. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have open bottom unless

otherwise indicated. 3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural

load rating consistent with enclosure. 4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, As indicated for each service. 6. Direct-Buried Wiring Entrance Provisions: Knockouts equipped with insulated bushings

or end-bell fittings, selected to suit box material, sized for wiring indicated, and arranged for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.

7. Duct Entrance Provisions: Duct-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.

8. Handholes 12 inches wide by 24 inches long and larger shall have factory-installed inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons.

B. Polymer Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with a polymer resin, and reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a combination of the two.


a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. c. NewBasis. d. Quazite: Hubbell Power System, Inc. e. Jensen Precast.

2.5 PRECAST MANHOLES


1. Christy Concrete Products. 2. Elmhurst-Chicago Stone Co. 3. Oldcastle Precast Group. 4. Rinker Group, Ltd. 5. Riverton Concrete Products. 6. Utility Concrete Products, LLC. 7. Utility Vault Co. 8. Wausau Tile Inc.

B. Comply with ASTM C 858.















C. Structural Design Loading: Comply with requirements in "Underground Enclosure Application" Article.

D. Precast Manholes: One-piece units and units with interlocking mating sections, complete with accessories, hardware, and features.

E. Windows: Precast openings in walls, arranged to match dimensions and elevations of approaching ducts and duct banks, plus an additional 12 inches (300 mm) vertically and horizontally to accommodate alignment variations.

1. Windows shall be located no less than 6 inches from interior surfaces of walls, floors, or roofs of manholes, but close enough to corners to facilitate racking of cables on walls.

2. Window opening shall have cast-in-place, welded-wire fabric reinforcement for field cutting and bending to tie in to concrete envelopes of duct banks.

3. Window openings shall be framed with at least two additional No. 3 steel reinforcing bars in concrete around each opening.

F. Duct Entrances in Manhole Walls: Cast end-bell or duct-terminating fitting in wall for each entering duct.

1. Type and size shall match fittings to duct or conduit to be terminated. 2. Fittings shall align with elevations of approaching ducts and be located near interior

corners of manholes to facilitate racking of cable.

G. Concrete Knockout Panels: 1-1/2 to 2 inches thick, for future conduit entrance and sleeve for ground rod.

H. Ground Rod Sleeve: Provide a 3-inch PVC conduit sleeve in manhole floors 2 inches from the wall adjacent to, but not underneath, the ducts routed from the facility.

I. Joint Sealant: Asphaltic-butyl material with adhesion, cohesion, flexibility, and durability properties necessary to withstand maximum hydrostatic pressures at the installation location with the ground-water level at grade.


A. Test and inspect precast concrete utility structures according to ASTM C 1037.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, manholes, handholes, and boxes with final arrangement of other utilities, site grading, and surface features as determined in the field. Notify Architect if there is a conflict between areas of excavation and existing structures or archaeological sites to remain.

B. Coordinate elevations of ducts and duct-bank entrances into manholes, handholes, and boxes with final locations and profiles of ducts and duct banks, as determined by coordination with



other utilities, underground obstructions, and surface features. Revise locations and elevations as required to suit field conditions and to ensure that duct runs drain to manholes and handholes, and as approved by Architect.

C. Clear and grub vegetation to be removed, and protect vegetation to remain according to Section 311000 "Site Clearing." Remove and stockpile topsoil for reapplication according to Section 311000 "Site Clearing."

3.2 UNDERGROUND DUCT APPLICATION

A. Ducts for Electrical Cables More than 600 V: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in concrete-encased duct bank unless otherwise indicated.

B. Ducts for Electrical Feeders 600 V and Less: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in concrete-encased duct bank unless otherwise indicated.

C. Ducts for Electrical Feeders 600 V and Less: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in direct-buried duct bank unless otherwise indicated.

D. Ducts for Electrical Branch Circuits: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in direct-buried duct bank unless otherwise indicated.

E. Underground Ducts Crossing Roadways: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, encased in reinforced concrete.

3.3 UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURE APPLICATION

A. Handholes and Boxes for 600 V and Less:

1. Units in Roadways and Other Deliberate Traffic Paths: Precast concrete. AASHTO HB 17, H-20 structural load rating.

2. Units in Driveway, Parking Lot, and Off-Roadway Locations, Subject to Occasional, Nondeliberate Loading by Heavy Vehicles: Precast concrete, AASHTO HB 17, H-20 structural load rating.

3. Units in Sidewalk and Similar Applications with a Safety Factor for Nondeliberate Loading by Vehicles: Polymer concrete units, SCTE 77, Tier 8 structural load rating.

4. Cover design load shall not exceed the design load of the handhole or box.

B. Manholes: Precast concrete.

1. Units Located in Roadways and Other Deliberate Traffic Paths by Heavy or Medium Vehicles: H-20 structural load rating according to AASHTO HB 17.

2. Units Not Located in Deliberate Traffic Paths by Heavy or Medium Vehicles: H-10 load rating according to AASHTO HB 17.

3.4 EARTHWORK

A. Excavation and Backfill: Comply with Section 312000 "Earth Moving," but do not use heavy-duty, hydraulic-operated, compaction equipment.



B. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation, and re-establish original grades unless otherwise indicated. Replace removed sod immediately after backfilling is completed.

C. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work. Restore vegetation and include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, and mulching. Comply with Section 329200 "Turf and Grasses" and Section 329300 "Plants."

D. Cut and patch existing pavement in the path of underground ducts and utility structures according to the "Cutting and Patching" Article in Section 017300 "Execution."

3.5 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Install ducts according to NEMA TCB 2.

B. Slope: Pitch ducts a minimum slope of 1:300 down toward manholes and handholes and away from buildings and equipment. Slope ducts from a high point in runs between two manholes, to drain in both directions.

C. Curves and Bends: Use 5-degree angle couplings for small changes in direction. Use manufactured long sweep bends with a minimum radius of 48 inches, both horizontally and vertically, at other locations unless otherwise indicated.

D. Joints: Use solvent-cemented joints in ducts and fittings and make watertight according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in same plane.

E. Installation Adjacent to High-Temperature Steam Lines: Where duct banks are installed parallel to underground steam lines, perform calculations showing the duct bank will not be subject to environmental temperatures above 40 deg C. Where environmental temperatures are calculated to rise above 40 deg C, and anywhere the duct bank crosses above an underground steam line, install insulation blankets listed for direct burial to isolate the duct bank from the steam line.

F. Duct Entrances to Manholes and Concrete and Polymer Concrete Handholes: Use end bells, spaced approximately 10 inches o.c. for 5-inch ducts, and vary proportionately for other duct sizes.

1. Begin change from regular spacing to end-bell spacing 10 feet from the end bell without reducing duct line slope and without forming a trap in the line.

2. Direct-Buried Duct Banks: Install an expansion and deflection fitting in each conduit in the area of disturbed earth adjacent to manhole or handhole. Install an expansion fitting near the center of all straight line direct-buried duct banks with calculated expansion of more than 3/4 inch.

3. Grout end bells into structure walls from both sides to provide watertight entrances.

G. Building Wall Penetrations: Make a transition from underground duct to rigid steel conduit at least 10 feet outside the building wall, without reducing duct line slope away from the building, and without forming a trap in the line. Use fittings manufactured for duct-to-conduit transition. Install conduit penetrations of building walls as specified in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."



H. Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that have cables pulled. Seal spare ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs to withstand at least 15-psig hydrostatic pressure.

I. Pulling Cord: Install 100-lbf- test nylon cord in empty ducts.

J. Concrete-Encased Ducts: Support ducts on duct separators.

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for duct bank. Prepare trench bottoms as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for pipes less than 6 inches in nominal diameter.

2. Width: Excavate trench 12 inches wider than duct bank on each side. 3. Width: Excavate trench 3 inches wider than duct bank on each side. 4. Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 24 inches below finished grade in areas not subject

to deliberate traffic, and at least 30 inches below finished grade in deliberate traffic paths for vehicles unless otherwise indicated.

5. Support ducts on duct separators coordinated with duct size, duct spacing, and outdoor temperature.

6. Separator Installation: Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts, with not less than four spacers per 20 feet of duct. Secure separators to earth and to ducts to prevent floating during concreting. Stagger separators approximately 6 inches between tiers. Tie entire assembly together using fabric straps; do not use tie wires or reinforcing steel that may form conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups.

7. Minimum Space between Ducts: 3 inches between ducts and exterior envelope wall, 2 inches between ducts for like services, and 4 inches between power and signal ducts.

8. Elbows: Use manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment, at building entrances through floor, and at changes of direction in duct run.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete.

b. Stub-Ups to Equipment: For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

9. Reinforcement: Reinforce concrete-encased duct banks where they cross disturbed earth and where indicated. Arrange reinforcing rods and ties without forming conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups.

10. Forms: Use walls of trench to form side walls of duct bank where soil is self-supporting and concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclusions; otherwise, use forms.

11. Concrete Cover: Install a minimum of 3 inches of concrete cover at top and bottom, and a minimum of 2 inches on each side of duct bank.

12. Concreting Sequence: Pour each run of envelope between manholes or other terminations in one continuous operation.

a. Start at one end and finish at the other, allowing for expansion and contraction of ducts as their temperature changes during and after the pour. Use expansion fittings installed according to manufacturer's written recommendations, or use other specific measures to prevent expansion-contraction damage.



b. If more than one pour is necessary, terminate each pour in a vertical plane and install 3/4-inch reinforcing-rod dowels extending a minimum of 18 inches into concrete on both sides of joint near corners of envelope.

13. Pouring Concrete: Comply with requirements in "Concrete Placement" Article in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Place concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and between conduits and at exterior surface of envelope. Do not allow a heavy mass of concrete to fall directly onto ducts. Allow concrete to flow to center of bank and rise up in middle, uniformly filling all open spaces. Do not use power-driven agitating equipment unless specifically designed for duct-bank application.

K. Direct-Buried Duct Banks:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for duct bank. Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for preparation of trench bottoms for pipes less than 6 inches in nominal diameter.


3. Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts, with not less than four spacers per 20 feet of duct. Secure separators to earth and to ducts to prevent displacement during backfill and yet permit linear duct movement due to expansion and contraction as temperature changes. Stagger spacers approximately 6 inches between tiers.

4. Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 36 inches below finished grade unless otherwise indicated.

5. Set elevation of bottom of duct bank below frost line. 6. Install ducts with a minimum of 3 inches between ducts for like services and 6 inches

between power and signal ducts. 7. Elbows: Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment, at

building entrances through floor, and at changes of direction in duct run unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout length of elbow.

8. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment, at building entrances through floor, and at changes of direction in duct run.


b. For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

9. After installing first tier of ducts, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point and work toward end of duct run, leaving ducts at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Repeat procedure after placing each tier. After placing last tier, hand place backfill to 4 inches over ducts and hand tamp. Firmly tamp backfill around ducts to provide maximum supporting strength. Use hand tamper only. After placing controlled backfill over final tier, make final duct connections at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction. Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for installation of backfill materials.

a. Place minimum 3 inches of sand as a bed for duct bank. Place sand to a minimum of 6 inches above top level of duct bank.



b. Place minimum 6 inches of engineered fill above concrete encasement of duct bank.

L. Warning Tape: Bury warning tape approximately 12 inches above all concrete-encased ducts and duct banks. Align tape parallel to and within 3 inches of centerline of duct bank. Provide an additional warning tape for each 12-inch increment of duct-bank width over a nominal 18 inches. Space additional tapes 12 inches apart, horizontally.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE MANHOLES, HANDHOLES, AND BOXES

A. Precast Concrete Handhole and Manhole Installation:

1. Comply with ASTM C 891 unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install units level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting

ducts, to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel,

graded from 1-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

B. Elevations:

1. Manhole Roof: Install with rooftop at least 15 inches below finished grade. 2. Manhole Frame: In paved areas and trafficways, set frames flush with finished grade. Set

other manhole frames 1 inch above finished grade. 3. Install handholes with bottom below frost line, below grade. 4. Handhole Covers: In paved areas and trafficways, set surface flush with finished grade.

Set covers of other handholes 1 inch above finished grade. 5. Where indicated, cast handhole cover frame integrally with handhole structure.

C. Drainage: Install drains in bottom of manholes where indicated. Coordinate with drainage provisions indicated.

D. Manhole Access: Circular opening in manhole roof; sized to match cover size.

1. Manholes with Fixed Ladders: Offset access opening from manhole centerlines to align with ladder.

2. Install chimney, constructed of precast concrete collars and rings, to support cast-iron frame to connect cover with manhole roof opening. Provide moisture-tight masonry joints and waterproof grouting for frame to chimney.

E. Hardware: Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, [and ]cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated.

F. Fixed Manhole Ladders: Arrange to provide for safe entry with maximum clearance from cables and other items in manholes.

G. Field-Installed Bolting Anchors in Manholes and Concrete Handholes: Do not drill deeper than 3-7/8 inches for manholes and 2 inches for handholes, for anchor bolts installed in the field. Use a minimum of two anchors for each cable stanchion.



3.7 INSTALLATION OF HANDHOLES AND BOXES OTHER THAN PRECAST CONCRETE

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting ducts, to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. Use box extension if required to match depths of ducts, and seal joint between box and extension as recommended by manufacturer.


C. Elevation: In paved areas and trafficways, set cover flush with finished grade. Set covers of other handholes 1 inch above finished grade.

D. Install handholes and boxes with bottom below frost line.

E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure.

F. Field cut openings for ducts and conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.

G. For enclosures installed in asphalt paving and subject to occasional, nondeliberate, heavy-vehicle loading, form and pour a concrete ring encircling, and in contact with, enclosure and with top surface screeded to top of box cover frame. Bottom of ring shall rest on compacted earth.

1. Concrete: 3000 psi, 28-day strength, complying with Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete," with a troweled finish.

2. Dimensions: 10 inches wide by 12 inches deep.

3.8 GROUNDING

A. Ground underground ducts and utility structures according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of installation of underground ducts and utility structures.

2. Pull solid aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint integrity and adequate bend radii, and test for out-of-round duct. Provide a minimum 6-inch- long mandrel equal to 80 percent fill of duct. If obstructions are indicated, remove obstructions and retest.



3. Test manhole grounding to ensure electrical continuity of grounding and bonding connections. Measure and report ground resistance as specified in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Correct deficiencies and retest as specified above to demonstrate compliance.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Pull leather-washer-type duct cleaner, with graduated washer sizes, through full length of ducts. Follow with rubber duct swab for final cleaning and to assist in spreading lubricant throughout ducts.

B. Clean internal surfaces of manholes, including sump. Remove foreign material.




SECTION 260543 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Direct-buried conduit, ducts, and duct accessories. 2. Concrete-encased conduit, ducts, and duct accessories. 3. Handholes and boxes. 4. Manholes.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Trafficways: Locations where vehicular or pedestrian traffic is a normal course of events.



1. Include duct-bank materials, including separators and miscellaneous components. 2. Include ducts and conduits and their accessories, including elbows, end bells, bends,

fittings, and solvent cement. 3. Include accessories for manholes, handholes, boxes. 4. Include warning tape.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Precast or Factory-Fabricated Underground Utility Structures:

a. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, attachments to other work, and accessories.

b. Include duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. c. Include reinforcement details. d. Include frame and cover design and manhole frame support rings. e. Include grounding details. f. Include dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, pulling-in and lifting irons,

and sumps. g. Include joint details.



2. Factory-Fabricated Handholes and Boxes Other Than Precast Concrete:

a. Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations, and fabrication and installation details.

b. Include duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. c. Include cover design. d. Include grounding details. e. Include dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, and pulling-in and lifting

irons.


A. Product Certificates: For concrete and steel used in precast concrete manholes and handholes, as required by ASTM C 858.

B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency responsible for testing nonconcrete handholes and boxes.



1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS SUBMITTALS


B. Furnish cable-support stanchions, arms, insulators, and associated fasteners in quantities equal to 5 percent of quantity of each item installed.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.


A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions, and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than five days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Construction Manager's written permission.

B. Ground Water: Assume ground-water level is below ground surface unless a higher water table is noted on Drawings. All dewatering operations will be performed by contractor as required for installations. Refer to geotechnical report for subsurface conditions.



1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace switchboard parts and products that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DUCTS AND RACEWAYS

A. Comply with ANSI C2.

2.2 CONDUIT

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Galvanized. Comply with ANSI C80.1.

B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, UL 651, with matching fittings by same manufacturer as the conduit, complying with NEMA TC 3 and UL 514B.

2.3 NONMETALLIC DUCTS AND DUCT ACCESSORIES


1. ARNCO Corp. 2. Beck Manufacturing. 3. Cantex, Inc. 4. CertainTeed Corporation. 5. Condux International, Inc. 6. ElecSys, Inc. 7. Electri-Flex Company. 8. IPEX Inc. 9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 10. Spiraduct/AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

B. Underground Plastic Utilities Duct: NEMA TC 2, UL 651, ASTM F 512, Type EPC-40, with matching fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 by same manufacturer as the duct.

C. Duct Accessories:

1. Duct Separators: Factory-fabricated rigid PVC interlocking spacers, sized for type and size of ducts with which used, and selected to provide minimum duct spacing indicated while supporting ducts during concreting or backfilling.

2. Warning Tape: Underground-line warning tape specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."













2.4 HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes: Comply with SCTE 77. Comply with tier requirements in "Underground Enclosure Application" Article.

1. Color: Gray. 2. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have open bottom unless

otherwise indicated. 3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural

load rating consistent with enclosure. 4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, As indicated for each service. 6. Direct-Buried Wiring Entrance Provisions: Knockouts equipped with insulated bushings

or end-bell fittings, selected to suit box material, sized for wiring indicated, and arranged for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.

7. Duct Entrance Provisions: Duct-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.

8. Handholes 12 inches wide by 24 inches long and larger shall have factory-installed inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons.

B. Polymer Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with a polymer resin, and reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a combination of the two.


a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. c. NewBasis. d. Quazite: Hubbell Power System, Inc. e. Jensen Precast.

2.5 PRECAST MANHOLES


1. Christy Concrete Products. 2. Elmhurst-Chicago Stone Co. 3. Oldcastle Precast Group. 4. Rinker Group, Ltd. 5. Riverton Concrete Products. 6. Utility Concrete Products, LLC. 7. Utility Vault Co. 8. Wausau Tile Inc.

B. Comply with ASTM C 858.















C. Structural Design Loading: Comply with requirements in "Underground Enclosure Application" Article.

D. Precast Manholes: One-piece units and units with interlocking mating sections, complete with accessories, hardware, and features.

E. Windows: Precast openings in walls, arranged to match dimensions and elevations of approaching ducts and duct banks, plus an additional 12 inches (300 mm) vertically and horizontally to accommodate alignment variations.

1. Windows shall be located no less than 6 inches from interior surfaces of walls, floors, or roofs of manholes, but close enough to corners to facilitate racking of cables on walls.

2. Window opening shall have cast-in-place, welded-wire fabric reinforcement for field cutting and bending to tie in to concrete envelopes of duct banks.

3. Window openings shall be framed with at least two additional No. 3 steel reinforcing bars in concrete around each opening.

F. Duct Entrances in Manhole Walls: Cast end-bell or duct-terminating fitting in wall for each entering duct.

1. Type and size shall match fittings to duct or conduit to be terminated. 2. Fittings shall align with elevations of approaching ducts and be located near interior

corners of manholes to facilitate racking of cable.

G. Concrete Knockout Panels: 1-1/2 to 2 inches thick, for future conduit entrance and sleeve for ground rod.

H. Ground Rod Sleeve: Provide a 3-inch PVC conduit sleeve in manhole floors 2 inches from the wall adjacent to, but not underneath, the ducts routed from the facility.

I. Joint Sealant: Asphaltic-butyl material with adhesion, cohesion, flexibility, and durability properties necessary to withstand maximum hydrostatic pressures at the installation location with the ground-water level at grade.


A. Test and inspect precast concrete utility structures according to ASTM C 1037.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, manholes, handholes, and boxes with final arrangement of other utilities, site grading, and surface features as determined in the field. Notify Architect if there is a conflict between areas of excavation and existing structures or archaeological sites to remain.

B. Coordinate elevations of ducts and duct-bank entrances into manholes, handholes, and boxes with final locations and profiles of ducts and duct banks, as determined by coordination with



other utilities, underground obstructions, and surface features. Revise locations and elevations as required to suit field conditions and to ensure that duct runs drain to manholes and handholes, and as approved by Architect.

C. Clear and grub vegetation to be removed, and protect vegetation to remain according to Section 311000 "Site Clearing." Remove and stockpile topsoil for reapplication according to Section 311000 "Site Clearing."

3.2 UNDERGROUND DUCT APPLICATION

A. Ducts for Electrical Cables More than 600 V: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in concrete-encased duct bank unless otherwise indicated.

B. Ducts for Electrical Feeders 600 V and Less: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in concrete-encased duct bank unless otherwise indicated.

C. Ducts for Electrical Feeders 600 V and Less: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in direct-buried duct bank unless otherwise indicated.

D. Ducts for Electrical Branch Circuits: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in direct-buried duct bank unless otherwise indicated.

E. Underground Ducts Crossing Roadways: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, encased in reinforced concrete.

3.3 UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURE APPLICATION

A. Handholes and Boxes for 600 V and Less:

1. Units in Roadways and Other Deliberate Traffic Paths: Precast concrete. AASHTO HB 17, H-20 structural load rating.

2. Units in Driveway, Parking Lot, and Off-Roadway Locations, Subject to Occasional, Nondeliberate Loading by Heavy Vehicles: Precast concrete, AASHTO HB 17, H-20 structural load rating.

3. Units in Sidewalk and Similar Applications with a Safety Factor for Nondeliberate Loading by Vehicles: Polymer concrete units, SCTE 77, Tier 8 structural load rating.

4. Cover design load shall not exceed the design load of the handhole or box.

B. Manholes: Precast concrete.

1. Units Located in Roadways and Other Deliberate Traffic Paths by Heavy or Medium Vehicles: H-20 structural load rating according to AASHTO HB 17.

2. Units Not Located in Deliberate Traffic Paths by Heavy or Medium Vehicles: H-10 load rating according to AASHTO HB 17.

3.4 EARTHWORK







3.5 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Install ducts according to NEMA TCB 2.

B. Slope: Pitch ducts a minimum slope of 1:300 down toward manholes and handholes and away from buildings and equipment. Slope ducts from a high point in runs between two manholes, to drain in both directions.

C. Curves and Bends: Use 5-degree angle couplings for small changes in direction. Use manufactured long sweep bends with a minimum radius of 48 inches, both horizontally and vertically, at other locations unless otherwise indicated.

D. Joints: Use solvent-cemented joints in ducts and fittings and make watertight according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in same plane.

E. Installation Adjacent to High-Temperature Steam Lines: Where duct banks are installed parallel to underground steam lines, perform calculations showing the duct bank will not be subject to environmental temperatures above 40 deg C. Where environmental temperatures are calculated to rise above 40 deg C, and anywhere the duct bank crosses above an underground steam line, install insulation blankets listed for direct burial to isolate the duct bank from the steam line.

F. Duct Entrances to Manholes and Concrete and Polymer Concrete Handholes: Use end bells, spaced approximately 10 inches o.c. for 5-inch ducts, and vary proportionately for other duct sizes.

1. Begin change from regular spacing to end-bell spacing 10 feet from the end bell without reducing duct line slope and without forming a trap in the line.

2. Direct-Buried Duct Banks: Install an expansion and deflection fitting in each conduit in the area of disturbed earth adjacent to manhole or handhole. Install an expansion fitting near the center of all straight line direct-buried duct banks with calculated expansion of more than 3/4 inch.

3. Grout end bells into structure walls from both sides to provide watertight entrances.

G. Building Wall Penetrations: Make a transition from underground duct to rigid steel conduit at least 10 feet outside the building wall, without reducing duct line slope away from the building, and without forming a trap in the line. Use fittings manufactured for duct-to-conduit transition. Install conduit penetrations of building walls as specified in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."



H. Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that have cables pulled. Seal spare ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs to withstand at least 15-psig hydrostatic pressure.

I. Pulling Cord: Install 100-lbf- test nylon cord in empty ducts.

J. Concrete-Encased Ducts: Support ducts on duct separators.

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for duct bank. Prepare trench bottoms as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for pipes less than 6 inches in nominal diameter.

2. Width: Excavate trench 12 inches wider than duct bank on each side. 3. Width: Excavate trench 3 inches wider than duct bank on each side. 4. Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 24 inches below finished grade in areas not subject

to deliberate traffic, and at least 30 inches below finished grade in deliberate traffic paths for vehicles unless otherwise indicated.


6. Separator Installation: Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts, with not less than four spacers per 20 feet of duct. Secure separators to earth and to ducts to prevent floating during concreting. Stagger separators approximately 6 inches between tiers. Tie entire assembly together using fabric straps; do not use tie wires or reinforcing steel that may form conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups.

7. Minimum Space between Ducts: 3 inches between ducts and exterior envelope wall, 2 inches between ducts for like services, and 4 inches between power and signal ducts.

8. Elbows: Use manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment, at building entrances through floor, and at changes of direction in duct run.


b. Stub-Ups to Equipment: For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

9. Reinforcement: Reinforce concrete-encased duct banks where they cross disturbed earth and where indicated. Arrange reinforcing rods and ties without forming conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups.

10. Forms: Use walls of trench to form side walls of duct bank where soil is self-supporting and concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclusions; otherwise, use forms.

11. Concrete Cover: Install a minimum of 3 inches of concrete cover at top and bottom, and a minimum of 2 inches on each side of duct bank.

12. Concreting Sequence: Pour each run of envelope between manholes or other terminations in one continuous operation.

a. Start at one end and finish at the other, allowing for expansion and contraction of ducts as their temperature changes during and after the pour. Use expansion fittings installed according to manufacturer's written recommendations, or use other specific measures to prevent expansion-contraction damage.



b. If more than one pour is necessary, terminate each pour in a vertical plane and install 3/4-inch reinforcing-rod dowels extending a minimum of 18 inches into concrete on both sides of joint near corners of envelope.

13. Pouring Concrete: Comply with requirements in "Concrete Placement" Article in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Place concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and between conduits and at exterior surface of envelope. Do not allow a heavy mass of concrete to fall directly onto ducts. Allow concrete to flow to center of bank and rise up in middle, uniformly filling all open spaces. Do not use power-driven agitating equipment unless specifically designed for duct-bank application.

K. Direct-Buried Duct Banks:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for duct bank. Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for preparation of trench bottoms for pipes less than 6 inches in nominal diameter.


3. Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts, with not less than four spacers per 20 feet of duct. Secure separators to earth and to ducts to prevent displacement during backfill and yet permit linear duct movement due to expansion and contraction as temperature changes. Stagger spacers approximately 6 inches between tiers.

4. Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 36 inches below finished grade unless otherwise indicated.

5. Set elevation of bottom of duct bank below frost line. 6. Install ducts with a minimum of 3 inches between ducts for like services and 6 inches

between power and signal ducts. 7. Elbows: Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment, at

building entrances through floor, and at changes of direction in duct run unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout length of elbow.

8. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment, at building entrances through floor, and at changes of direction in duct run.


b. For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

9. After installing first tier of ducts, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point and work toward end of duct run, leaving ducts at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Repeat procedure after placing each tier. After placing last tier, hand place backfill to 4 inches over ducts and hand tamp. Firmly tamp backfill around ducts to provide maximum supporting strength. Use hand tamper only. After placing controlled backfill over final tier, make final duct connections at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction. Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for installation of backfill materials.

a. Place minimum 3 inches of sand as a bed for duct bank. Place sand to a minimum of 6 inches above top level of duct bank.



b. Place minimum 6 inches of engineered fill above concrete encasement of duct bank.

L. Warning Tape: Bury warning tape approximately 12 inches above all concrete-encased ducts and duct banks. Align tape parallel to and within 3 inches of centerline of duct bank. Provide an additional warning tape for each 12-inch increment of duct-bank width over a nominal 18 inches. Space additional tapes 12 inches apart, horizontally.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE MANHOLES, HANDHOLES, AND BOXES

A. Precast Concrete Handhole and Manhole Installation:

1. Comply with ASTM C 891 unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install units level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting

ducts, to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel,

graded from 1-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

B. Elevations:

1. Manhole Roof: Install with rooftop at least 15 inches below finished grade. 2. Manhole Frame: In paved areas and trafficways, set frames flush with finished grade. Set

other manhole frames 1 inch above finished grade. 3. Install handholes with bottom below frost line, below grade. 4. Handhole Covers: In paved areas and trafficways, set surface flush with finished grade.

Set covers of other handholes 1 inch above finished grade. 5. Where indicated, cast handhole cover frame integrally with handhole structure.

C. Drainage: Install drains in bottom of manholes where indicated. Coordinate with drainage provisions indicated.

D. Manhole Access: Circular opening in manhole roof; sized to match cover size.

1. Manholes with Fixed Ladders: Offset access opening from manhole centerlines to align with ladder.

2. Install chimney, constructed of precast concrete collars and rings, to support cast-iron frame to connect cover with manhole roof opening. Provide moisture-tight masonry joints and waterproof grouting for frame to chimney.

E. Hardware: Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, [and ]cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated.

F. Fixed Manhole Ladders: Arrange to provide for safe entry with maximum clearance from cables and other items in manholes.

G. Field-Installed Bolting Anchors in Manholes and Concrete Handholes: Do not drill deeper than 3-7/8 inches for manholes and 2 inches for handholes, for anchor bolts installed in the field. Use a minimum of two anchors for each cable stanchion.



3.7 INSTALLATION OF HANDHOLES AND BOXES OTHER THAN PRECAST CONCRETE

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting ducts, to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. Use box extension if required to match depths of ducts, and seal joint between box and extension as recommended by manufacturer.


C. Elevation: In paved areas and trafficways, set cover flush with finished grade. Set covers of other handholes 1 inch above finished grade.

D. Install handholes and boxes with bottom below frost line.

E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure.

F. Field cut openings for ducts and conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.

G. For enclosures installed in asphalt paving and subject to occasional, nondeliberate, heavy-vehicle loading, form and pour a concrete ring encircling, and in contact with, enclosure and with top surface screeded to top of box cover frame. Bottom of ring shall rest on compacted earth.

1. Concrete: 3000 psi, 28-day strength, complying with Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete," with a troweled finish.

2. Dimensions: 10 inches wide by 12 inches deep.

3.8 GROUNDING

A. Ground underground ducts and utility structures according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of installation of underground ducts and utility structures.

2. Pull solid aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint integrity and adequate bend radii, and test for out-of-round duct. Provide a minimum 6-inch- long mandrel equal to 80 percent fill of duct. If obstructions are indicated, remove obstructions and retest.



3. Test manhole grounding to ensure electrical continuity of grounding and bonding connections. Measure and report ground resistance as specified in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Correct deficiencies and retest as specified above to demonstrate compliance.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Pull leather-washer-type duct cleaner, with graduated washer sizes, through full length of ducts. Follow with rubber duct swab for final cleaning and to assist in spreading lubricant throughout ducts.

B. Clean internal surfaces of manholes, including sump. Remove foreign material.




SECTION 260544 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors. 2. Sleeve-seal systems. 3. Sleeve-seal fittings. 4. Grout. 5. Silicone sealants.


1. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire-resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating items.



B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For sealants, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4: For sealants, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Wall Sleeves:

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING

260544 - 1


1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain ends.

2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:

1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel. 2. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and with no side larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches or more and one or more sides larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.

2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable.


a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. CALPICO, Inc. c. Metraflex Company (The). d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. e. Proco Products, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to

sealing elements.

2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS

A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD.


a. Presealed Systems.


260544 - 2








2.4 GROUT

A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or floors.

B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

2.5 SILICONE SEALANTS

A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below.

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated.

2. Sealant shall have VOC content of 10g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.

C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls:

1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:

a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing.

2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or

cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different clearance.


260544 - 3


4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.

5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.

D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:

1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway entries into building.

B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.



260544 - 4


SECTION 260548.16 - SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Restraint channel bracings. 2. Restraint cables. 3. Seismic-restraint accessories. 4. Mechanical anchor bolts. 5. Adhesive anchor bolts.


1. Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for commonly used electrical supports and installation requirements.



1. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic-restraint component used.

a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each seismic-restraint device.

1. Include design calculations and details for selecting seismic restraints complying with performance requirements, design criteria, and analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading caused by equipment weight, operation, and seismic and wind forces required to select seismic and wind restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.

SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260548.16 - 1


a. Coordinate design calculations with wind load calculations required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Sections for equipment mounted outdoors.

3. Seismic- and Wind-Restraint Details:

a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic and wind restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.

b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices.

c. Coordinate seismic-restraint and vibration isolation details with wind-restraint details required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Sections for equipment mounted outdoors.

d. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).


A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical components with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints.

B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.

C. Welding certificates.



A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7 and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis. They shall bear anchorage preapproval from OSHPD in addition to preapproval, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings, by ICC-ES or another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred.



Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) that support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Wind-Restraint Loading:

1. Basic Wind Speed: 90mph. 2. Building Classification Category: II. 3. Minimum 10 lb/sq. ft. multiplied by maximum area of HVAC component projected on

vertical plane normal to wind direction and 45 degrees either side of normal.

B. Seismic-Restraint Loading:

1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: D. 2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: II.

a. Component Importance Factor: 1.0. b. Component Response Modification Factor: 1.5. c. Component Amplification Factor: 2.5.

3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): 1.00g. 4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-Second Period: 10%.

2.2 RESTRAINT CHANNEL BRACINGS


1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a Division of Cooper Industries. 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. Mason Industries, Inc. 4. Unistrut; Atkore International.

B. Description: MFMA-4, shop- or field-fabricated bracing assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end, with other matching components, and with corrosion-resistant coating; rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.

2.3 RESTRAINT CABLES








1. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 2. Loos & Co., Inc. 3. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

B. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized-steel cables. End connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.

2.4 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT ACCESSORIES


1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a Division of Cooper Industries. 2. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 3. Mason Industries, Inc. 4. TOLCO; a brand of NIBCO INC.

B. Hanger-Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections to hanger rod. Do not weld stiffeners to rods.

C. Hinged and Swivel Brace Attachments: Multifunctional steel connectors for attaching hangers to rigid channel bracings and restraint cables.

D. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.

E. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings and matched to type and size of attachment devices used.

F. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face.

2.5 MECHANICAL ANCHOR BOLTS


1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a Division of Cooper Industries. 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 4. Mason Industries, Inc.

B. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight times diameter.














2.6 ADHESIVE ANCHOR BOLTS


1. Hilti, Inc. 2. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 3. Mason Industries, Inc.

B. Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing PVC or urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Hanger-Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger-rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods caused by seismic forces.

C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits.

3.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and formwork specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

B. Equipment and Hanger Restraints:






1. Install resilient, bolt-isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch.

2. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.

C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.

D. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

E. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

F. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.

5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque using a torque wrench. 6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior

applications.

3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION

A. Install flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where connection is terminated to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach equipment.



B. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.



2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice.

3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary load-spreading members.

4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect.

5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.

C. Seismic controls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.

END OF SECTION 260548.16



SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Underground-line warning tape. 5. Warning labels and signs. 6. Instruction signs. 7. Equipment identification labels. 8. Miscellaneous identification products.


A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.

B. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products.

C. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2.


C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 1


1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER AND CONTROL RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.

C. Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

D. Snap-Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

E. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

2.2 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each cable size.

B. Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

C. Self-Adhesive, Self-Laminating Polyester Labels: Preprinted, 3-mil- thick flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive that provides a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant, self-



laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the cable diameter such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend.

D. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tube with machine-printed identification label. Sized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around cable it identifies. Full shrink recovery at a maximum of 200 deg F. Comply with UL 224.

E. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

F. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

2.3 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide.

2.4 FLOOR MARKING TAPE

A. 2-inch- wide, 5-mil pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with yellow and black stripes and clear vinyl overlay.

2.5 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE

A. Tape:

1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines.

2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. 3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when

exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.

B. Color and Printing:

1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5. 2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE . 3. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE,

COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE, FIRE ALARM.

2.6 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated.



C. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."

2.7 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.

1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable

equipment.

2.8 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

2.9 CABLE TIES

A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding.

B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 4. Color: Black.

C. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi. 3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F. 5. Color: Black.



2.10 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

F. Attach plastic raceway and cable labels that are not self-adhesive type with clear vinyl tape with adhesive appropriate to the location and substrate.

G. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.

H. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

I. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:

1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon. 2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.

J. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench exceeds 16 inches overall.

K. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application.



3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30A, and 120V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label. Install labels at 30-foot maximum intervals.

B. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:

1. Power.

C. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.

1. Color-Coding for Phase Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors.

a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if authorities having jurisdiction permit.

b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue.

c. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

D. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, More than 600 V: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use nonmetallic plastic tag holder with adhesive-backed phase tags, and a separate tag with the circuit designation.

E. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels.

F. Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use self-adhesive vinyl labels with the conductor or cable designation, origin, and destination.

G. Control-Circuit Conductor Termination Identification: For identification at terminations provide self-adhesive vinyl labels with the conductor designation.

H. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.



2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

I. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.

1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables. 2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in

raceway.

J. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

K. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-adhesive warning labels.

1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of

equipment including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Power transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections.

L. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

M. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch- high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer.

N. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch- high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.



c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor.

d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.

b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Switchboards. e. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the

transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary. f. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. g. Enclosed switches. h. Enclosed circuit breakers. i. Enclosed controllers. j. Variable-speed controllers. k. Push-button stations. l. Power transfer equipment. m. Contactors. n. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. o. Power-generating units. p. Monitoring and control equipment.




SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Time switches. 2. Photoelectric switches. 3. Standalone daylight-harvesting switching controls. 4. Indoor occupancy sensors. 5. Outdoor motion sensors. 6. Lighting contactors. 7. Emergency shunt relays.


1. Section 262726 "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, wall-switch occupancy sensors, and manual light switches.



B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy and light-level sensors.

1. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring. 2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of lighting control device to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 1


1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace lighting control devices parts and products that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TIME SWITCHES


1. Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Intermatic, Inc. 3. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. 4. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products. 5. Tyco Electronics; ALR Brand.

B. Electronic Time Switches: Solid state, programmable, with alphanumeric display; complying with UL 917.

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2. Contact Configuration: SPST. 3. Contact Rating: 20-A ballast load, 120-/240-V ac. 4. Programs: Eight on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule and an annual holiday schedule

that overrides the weekly operation on holidays. 5. Circuitry: Allow connection of a photoelectric relay as substitute for on-off function of a

program on selected channels. 6. Astronomic Time: All channels. 7. Automatic daylight savings time changeover. 8. Battery Backup: Not less than seven days reserve, to maintain schedules and time clock.

2.2 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following:

1. Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Intermatic, Inc. 3. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products. 4. Tyco Electronics; ALR Brand.












B. Description: Solid state, with SPST dry contacts rated for 1800-VA tungsten or 1000-VA inductive, to operate connected relay, contactor coils, or microprocessor input; complying with UL 773A.


2. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range, and a directional lens in front of the photocell to prevent fixed light sources from causing turn-off.

3. Time Delay: Fifteen second minimum, to prevent false operation. 4. Surge Protection: Metal-oxide varistor. 5. Mounting: Twist lock complies with NEMA C136.10, with base-and-stem mounting or

stem-and-swivel mounting accessories as required to direct sensor to the north sky exposure.

2.3 DAYLIGHT-HARVESTING SWITCHING CONTROLS


1. Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Eaton Corporation. 3. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. 4. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. 5. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. 6. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products. 7. Sensor Switch, Inc. 8. Tyco Electronics; ALR Brand. 9. Watt Stopper.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Switching Controls: Solid-state, light-level sensor unit, with separate power pack, to detect changes in indoor lighting levels that are perceived by the eye.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories:


2. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F. 3. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the associated power pack, complying with

UL 773A. Sensor is powered by the power pack. 4. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc,

150-mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70. 5. General Space Sensors Light-Level Monitoring Range: 10 to 200 fc, with an adjustment

for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range. 6. Skylight Sensors Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1000 to 10,000 fc, with an adjustment

for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range. 7. Time Delay: Adjustable from 5 to 300 seconds to prevent cycling. 8. Set-Point Adjustment: Equip with deadband adjustment of 25, 50, and 75 percent above

the "on" set point, or provide with separate adjustable "on" and "off" set points. 9. Test Mode: User selectable, overriding programmed time delay to allow settings check.












10. Control Load Status: User selectable to confirm that load wiring is correct. 11. Indicator: Two digital displays to indicate the beginning of on-off cycles.

2.4 DAYLIGHT-HARVESTING DIMMING CONTROLS


1. Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 4. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 5. Watt Stopper.

B. System Description: Sensing daylight and electrical lighting levels, the system adjusts the indoor electrical lighting levels. As daylight increases, the lights are dimmed.

1. Lighting control set point is based on two lighting conditions:

a. When no daylight is present (target level). b. When significant daylight is present.

2. System programming is done with two hand-held, remote-control tools.

a. Initial setup tool. b. Tool for occupants to adjust the target levels by increasing the set point up to 25

percent, or by minimizing the electric lighting level.

C. Ceiling-Mounted Dimming Controls: Solid-state, light-level sensor unit, with separate controller unit, to detect changes in lighting levels that are perceived by the eye.


2. Sensor Output: 0- to 10-V dc to operate electronic dimming ballasts. Sensor is powered by controller unit.

3. Power Pack: Sensor has 24-V dc, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70. 4. Light-Level Sensor Set-Point Adjustment Range: 20 to 60 fc.

2.5 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS


1. Bryant Electric. 2. Cooper Industries, Inc. 3. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. 4. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. 5. Lightolier Controls. 6. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc.














7. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 8. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products. 9. Sensor Switch, Inc. 10. Square D. 11. Watt Stopper.

B. General Requirements for Sensors: Wall- or ceiling-mounted, solid-state indoor occupancy sensors with a separate power pack.


2. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and turn them off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.

3. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor is powered from the power pack.

4. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70.

5. Mounting:

a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical

enclosure. c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged

door.

6. Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and normal operation of sensor.

7. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure. 8. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc; turn lights off when selected

lighting level is present.

C. PIR Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area by their heat and movement.

1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in..

2. Detection Coverage (Room): Detect occupancy anywhere in a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.

3. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy within 90 feet when mounted on a 9-foot- high ceiling.

D. Ultrasonic Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area through pattern changes of reflected ultrasonic energy .

1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s.

2. Detection Coverage (Small Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 600 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.

3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.








4. Detection Coverage (Large Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 2000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.

5. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy anywhere within 90 feet when mounted on a 10-foot- high ceiling in a corridor not wider than 14 feet.

E. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area using PIR and ultrasonic detection methods. The particular technology or combination of technologies that control on-off functions is selectable in the field by operating controls on unit.

1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology. 2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any portion of

a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in., and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s.

3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.

2.6 SWITCHBOX-MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORS


1. Bryant Electric. 2. Cooper Industries, Inc. 3. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. 4. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. 5. Lightolier Controls. 6. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. 7. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 8. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products. 9. RAB Lighting. 10. Sensor Switch, Inc. 11. Square D. 12. Watt Stopper.

B. General Requirements for Sensors: Automatic-wall-switch occupancy sensor, suitable for mounting in a single gang switchbox.


2. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F. 3. Switch Rating: Not less than 800-VA fluorescent at 120 V, and 800-W LED.

C. Wall-Switch Sensor Tag WS1:

1. Standard Range: 180-degree field of view, field adjustable from 180 to 40 degrees; with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft. (84 sq. m).

2. Sensing Technology: Dual technology - PIR and ultrasonic. 3. Switch Type: SP manual and automatic "on", manual and automatic "off." 4. Voltage:120 V; dual-technology type.















5. Concealed, field-adjustable, "off" time-delay selector at up to 30 minutes. 6. Concealed "off" time-delay selector at 30 seconds, and 5, 10, and 20 minutes. 7. Adaptive Technology: Self-adjusting circuitry detects and memorizes usage patterns of

the space and helps eliminate false "off" switching.

D. Wall-Switch Sensor Tag WS2:

1. Standard Range: 210-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft.. 2. Sensing Technology: Dual technology - PIR and ultrasonic. 3. Switch Type: SP, dual circuit, manual and automatic "on", manual and automatic "off." 4. Voltage: 120 V; dual-technology type. 5. Concealed, field-adjustable, "off" time-delay selector at up to 30 minutes. 6. Concealed "off" time-delay selector at 30 seconds, and 5, 10, and 20 minutes. 7. Adaptive Technology: Self-adjusting circuitry detects and memorizes usage patterns of

the space and helps eliminate false "off" switching.

2.7 EXTREME-TEMPERATURE OCCUPANCY SENSORS


1. Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Sensor Switch, Inc. 3. Watt Stopper.

B. Description: Ceiling-mounted, solid-state, extreme-temperature occupancy sensors with a separate power pack.

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended application in damp locations.

2. Operation: Turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and turn them off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 30 minutes.

3. Operating Ambient Conditions: From minus 40 to plus 125 deg F. 4. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A.

Sensor is powered from the power pack. 5. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- V ac, for 13-A tungsten at

120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70.

6. Mounting:

a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical

enclosure. c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind cover.

7. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure. 8. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 10 fc; keep lighting off when

selected lighting level is present.






C. Detector Technology: PIR. Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area by their heat and movement.

1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in.

2. Detection Coverage (Room): Detect occupancy anywhere in a circular area of 1500 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.


A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression systems, and partition assemblies.

B. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Wiring Method: Comply with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size is 1/2 inch.

B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.

D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.



3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors. 2. Identify circuits or luminaires controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each

sensor.

B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

C. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


E. Commissioning of lighting control system shall include factory assembled submittals that include one-line diagram (or reflected ceiling plan when applicable) showing system components and quantities, such as relays, low voltage switches and sensors, dataline and network components; drawings for each panel showing hardware configuration and numbering; panel wiring schedules showing circuit/relay/load relationships and any direct overrides; typical wiring diagrams for each component; and installation instructions and testing procedures for each component.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

1. For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector range. Set time delay to suit Owner's operations.

2. For daylighting controls, adjust set points and deadband controls to suit Owner's operations.



3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices. Video record the demonstration and turn over the recording to the Owner.




SECTION 261200 - MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following types of transformers with medium-voltage primaries:

1. Pad-mounted, liquid-filled transformers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NETA ATS: Acceptance Testing Specification.


A. Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances, installed devices and features, location of each field connection, and performance for each type and size of transformer indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power and control wiring.


A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Underground primary and secondary conduit stub-up location. 2. Dimensioned concrete base, outline of transformer, and required clearances. 3. Ground rod and grounding cable locations.

B. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transformer assembly and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:


MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 261200 - 1


a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."



C. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

D. Source quality-control test reports.

E. Field quality-control test reports.

F. Follow-up service reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformer and accessories to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of transformers and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Section 016000 "Product Requirements."

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D. Comply with IEEE C2.

E. Comply with ANSI C57.12.10, ANSI C57.12.28, IEEE C57.12.70, and IEEE C57.12.80.

F. Comply with NFPA 70.



1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store transformers protected from weather and so condensation will not form on or in units. Provide temporary heating according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Service Conditions: IEEE C37.121, usual service conditions except for the following:

1. Exposure to significant solar radiation. 2. Altitudes above 3300 feet. 3. Exposure to fumes, vapors, or dust. 4. Exposure to explosive environments. 5. Exposure to hot and humid climate or to excessive moisture, including steam, salt spray,

and dripping water. 6. Exposure to seismic shock or to abnormal vibration, shock, or tilting. 7. Exposure to excessively high or low temperatures. 8. Unusual transportation or storage conditions. 9. Unusual grounding-resistance conditions. 10. Unusual space limitations.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.

B. Coordinate installation of louvers, doors, spill retention areas, and sumps. Coordinate installation so no piping or conduits are installed in space allocated for medium-voltage transformers except those directly associated with transformers.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transformer parts and products that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Acme Electric Corporation. 2. Cooper Industries.






3. Cutler-Hammer. 4. Federal Pacific Transformer Company*. 5. GE Electrical Distribution & Control. 6. Hammond Manufacturing. 7. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 8. Square D; Schneider Electric. 9. Virginia Transformer Corp.

2.2 PAD-MOUNTED, LIQUID-FILLED TRANSFORMERS

A. Description: ANSI C57.12.13, IEEE C57.12.00, pad-mounted, 2-winding transformers. Stainless-steel tank base, cabinet, and sills.

B. Insulating Liquid: Less flammable, edible-seed-oil based, and UL listed as complying with NFPA 70 requirements for fire point of not less than 300 deg C when tested according to ASTM D 92. Liquid shall be biodegradable and nontoxic.

C. Insulation Temperature Rise: 65 deg C when operated at rated kVA output in a 40 deg C ambient temperature. Transformer shall be rated to operate at rated kilovolt ampere in an average ambient temperature of 30 deg C over 24 hours with a maximum ambient temperature of 40 deg C without loss of service life expectancy.

D. Basic Impulse Level: 30 kV.

E. Full-Capacity Voltage Taps: Four 2.5 percent taps, 2 above and 2 below rated high voltage; with externally operable tap changer for de-energized use and with position indicator and padlock hasp.

F. High-Voltage Switch: 200 A, make-and-latch rating of 10-kA RMS, symmetrical, arranged for radial feed with 3-phase, 2-position, gang-operated, load-break switch that is oil immersed in transformer tank with hook-stick operating handle in primary compartment.

G. Primary Fuses: 150-kV fuse assembly with fuses complying with IEEE C37.47. Rating of current-limiting fuses shall be 50-kA RMS at specified system voltage.

1. Current-limiting type in dry-fuse holder wells, mechanically interlocked with liquid-immersed switch in transformer tank to prevent disconnect under load.

H. Surge Arresters: Distribution class, one for each primary phase; complying with IEEE C62.11 and NEMA LA 1; support from tank wall within high-voltage compartment. Transformers shall have three arresters for radial-feed circuits.

I. High-Voltage Terminations and Equipment: Dead front with universal-type bushing wells for dead-front bushing-well inserts, complying with IEEE 386 and including the following:

1. Bushing-Well Inserts: One for each high-voltage bushing well. 2. Surge Arresters: Dead-front, elbow-type, metal-oxide-varistor units. 3. Parking Stands: One for each high-voltage bushing well. 4. Portable Insulated Bushings: Arranged for parking insulated, high-voltage, load-break

cable terminators; one for each primary feeder conductor terminating at transformer.










J. Accessories:

1. Drain Valve: 1 inch, with sampling device. 2. Dial-type thermometer. 3. Liquid-level gage. 4. Pressure-vacuum gage. 5. Pressure Relief Device: Self-sealing with an indicator. 6. Mounting provisions for low-voltage current transformers. 7. Mounting provisions for low-voltage potential transformers. 8. Busway terminal connection at low-voltage compartment. 9. Alarm contacts for gages and thermometer listed above.

2.3 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each transformer, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Factory Tests: Perform design and routine tests according to standards specified for components. Conduct transformer tests according to IEEE C57.12.90.

B. Factory Tests: Perform the following factory-certified tests on each transformer:

1. Resistance measurements of all windings on rated-voltage connection and on tap extreme connections.

2. Ratios on rated-voltage connection and on tap extreme connections. 3. Polarity and phase relation on rated-voltage connection. 4. No-load loss at rated voltage on rated-voltage connection. 5. Excitation current at rated voltage on rated-voltage connection. 6. Impedance and load loss at rated current on rated-voltage connection and on tap extreme

connections. 7. Applied potential. 8. Induced potential. 9. Temperature Test: If transformer is supplied with auxiliary cooling equipment to provide

more than one rating, test at lowest kilovolt-ampere Class OA or Class AA rating and highest kilovolt-ampere Class OA/FA or Class AA/FA rating.

a. Temperature test is not required if record of temperature test on an essentially duplicate unit is available.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for medium-voltage transformers.

B. Examine roughing-in of conduits and grounding systems to verify the following:

1. Wiring entries comply with layout requirements. 2. Entries are within conduit-entry tolerances specified by manufacturer and no feeders will

have to cross section barriers to reach load or line lugs.

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where transformers will be installed.

D. Verify that ground connections are in place and that requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install transformers on concrete bases.

1. Anchor transformers to concrete bases according to manufacturer's written instructions, seismic codes at Project, and requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

2. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit and 6 inches high.

3. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

5. Tack-weld or bolt transformers to channel-iron sills embedded in concrete bases. Install sills level and grout flush with floor or base.

B. Maintain minimum clearances and workspace at equipment according to manufacturer's written instructions and NFPA 70.

3.3 EARTHWORK






3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs as specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing transformers but before primary is energized, verify that grounding system at substation is tested at specified value or less.

2. After installing transformers and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

3. Perform visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS. Certify compliance with test parameters.

4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

C. Test Reports: Prepare written reports to record the following:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective actions taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.

D. Voltage Monitoring and Adjusting: Prior to final acceptance, perform the following voltage monitoring:

1. During a period of normal load cycles as evaluated by Owner, perform seven days of three-phase voltage recording at secondary terminals of each transformer. Use voltmeters with calibration traceable to National Institute of Science and Technology standards and with a chart speed of not less than 1 inch per hour. Voltage unbalance greater than 1 percent between phases, or deviation of any phase voltage from nominal value by more than plus or minus 5 percent during test period, is unacceptable.



2. Corrective Actions: If test results are unacceptable, perform the following corrective actions, as appropriate:

a. Adjust transformer taps. b. Prepare written request for voltage adjustment by electric utility.

3. Retests: After corrective actions have been performed, repeat monitoring until satisfactory results are obtained.

4. Report: Prepare written report covering monitoring and corrective actions performed.

E. Infrared Scanning: Perform as specified in Section 262413 "Switchboards."




SECTION 262413 - SWITCHBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Service and distribution switchboards rated 600 V and less. 2. Disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. 3. Instrumentation. 4. Control power. 5. Accessory components and features. 6. Identification.


A. Seismic Performance: Switchboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."


A. Product Data: For each type of switchboard, overcurrent protective device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each switchboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Detail short-circuit current rating of switchboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Include descriptive documentation of optional barriers specified for electrical insulation

and isolation. 6. Detail for future utility company's metering provisions.

SWITCHBOARDS 262413 - 1


7. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 8. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components. 9. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device included in switchboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

10. Include diagram and details of proposed mimic bus. 11. Include schematic and wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and testing agency.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:




C. Field Quality-Control Reports:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Routine maintenance requirements for switchboards and all installed components. 2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective

devices. 3. Time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective

device included in switchboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS




1. Potential Transformer Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type.

2. Control-Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers qualified as defined in NEMA PB 2.1 and trained in electrical safety as required by NFPA 70E.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

D. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for switchboards including clearances between switchboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

F. Comply with NEMA PB 2.

G. Comply with NFPA 70.

H. Comply with UL 891.


A. Deliver switchboards in sections or lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path.

B. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside switchboards and to prevent condensation.

C. Handle and prepare switchboards for installation according to NECA 400 and NEMA PB 2.1.


A. Installation Pathway: Remove and replace access fencing, doors, lift-out panels, and structures to provide pathway for moving switchboards into place.

B. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install switchboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above switchboards is complete, and temporary



HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F. b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

C. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 2, usual service conditions, as follows:

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switchboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace switchboard parts and products that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

2. See additional warranty requirements for failures caused by other system components as noted by 260543 1.9.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS


1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.







B. Front-Connected, Front-Accessible Switchboards:

1. Main Devices: Panel mounted. 2. Branch Devices: Panel mounted. 3. Sections front and rear aligned.

C. Nominal System Voltage: 208Y/120 V.

D. Main-Bus Continuous: Amperage as indicated on the drawings.

E. Seismic Requirements: Fabricate and test switchboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

F. Indoor Enclosures: Steel, NEMA 250, Type 1.

G. Enclosure Finish for Indoor Units: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray finish over a rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface.

H. Barriers: Between adjacent switchboard sections.

I. Insulation and isolation for main bus of main section and main and vertical buses of feeder sections.

J. Utility Metering Compartment: For future utility metering, fabricated, barrier compartment and section complying with utility company's requirements; hinged sealed door; buses provisioned for mounting utility company's current transformers and potential transformers or potential taps as required by utility company. If separate vertical section is required for utility metering, match and align with basic switchboard. Provide service entrance label and necessary applicable service entrance features.

K. Bus Transition and Incoming Pull Sections: Matched and aligned with basic switchboard.

L. Hinged Front Panels: Allow access to circuit breaker, metering, accessory, and blank compartments.

M. Pull Box on Top of Switchboard:

1. Adequate ventilation to maintain temperature in pull box within same limits as switchboard.

2. Set back from front to clear circuit-breaker removal mechanism. 3. Removable covers shall form top, front, and sides. Top covers at rear shall be easily

removable for drilling and cutting. 4. Bottom shall be insulating, fire-resistive material with separate holes for cable drops into

switchboard. 5. Cable supports shall be arranged to facilitate cabling and adequate to support cables

indicated, including those for future installation.

N. Buses and Connections: Three phase, four wire unless otherwise indicated.

1. Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Tin-plated, high-strength, electrical-grade aluminum alloy with tin-plated aluminum circuit-breaker line connections.



2. Load Terminals: Insulated, rigidly braced, runback bus extensions, of same material as through buses, equipped with mechanical connectors for outgoing circuit conductors. Provide load terminals for future circuit-breaker positions at full-ampere rating of circuit-breaker position.

3. Ground Bus: 1/4-by-2-inch, hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, equipped with mechanical connectors for feeder and branch-circuit ground conductors.

4. Main Phase Buses and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of switchboard's main and distribution sections. Provide for future extensions from both ends.

5. Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of phase buses unless otherwise indicated, equipped with mechanical connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables. Brace bus extensions for busway feeder neutral bus.

6. Isolation Barrier Access Provisions: Permit checking of bus-bolt tightness.

O. Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, and appurtenances at full rating of circuit-breaker compartment.

P. Bus-Bar Insulation: Factory-applied, flame-retardant, tape wrapping of individual bus bars or flame-retardant, spray-applied insulation. Minimum insulation temperature rating of 105 deg C.

2.2 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2.3 INSTRUMENTATION

A. Instrument Transformers: IEEE C57.13, NEMA EI 21.1, and the following:

1. Potential Transformers: IEEE C57.13; 120 V, 60 Hz, single secondary; disconnecting type with integral fuse mountings. Burden and accuracy shall be consistent with connected metering and relay devices.

2. Current Transformers: IEEE C57.13; 5 A, 60 Hz, secondary; wound type; single secondary winding and secondary shorting device. Burden and accuracy shall be consistent with connected metering and relay devices.

3. Control-Power Transformers: Dry type, mounted in separate compartments for units larger than 3 kVA.

B. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Microprocessor-based unit suitable for three- or four-wire systems and with the following features:

1. Switch-selectable digital display of the following values with maximum accuracy tolerances as indicated:

a. Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.



b. Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. c. Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. d. Megawatts: Plus or minus 2 percent. e. Megavars: Plus or minus 2 percent. f. Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent. g. Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent. h. Accumulated Energy, Megawatt Hours: Plus or minus 2 percent; accumulated

values unaffected by power outages up to 72 hours. i. Megawatt Demand: Plus or minus 2 percent; demand interval programmable from

five to 60 minutes. j. Contact devices to operate remote impulse-totalizing demand meter.

2. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semiflush mounted in instrument compartment door.

2.4 CONTROL POWER

A. Control Circuits: 24-V dc.

B. Control-Power Fuses: Primary and secondary fuses for current-limiting and overload protection of transformer and fuses for protection of control circuits.

C. Control Wiring: Factory installed, with bundling, lacing, and protection included. Provide flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and for conductors for interconnections between shipping units.

2.5 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store switchboards according to NECA 400 and NEMA PB 2.1.

B. Examine switchboards before installation. Reject switchboards that are moisture damaged or physically damaged.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive switchboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install switchboards and accessories according to NECA 400 and NEMA PB 2.1.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install switchboards on concrete base, 6-inch nominal thickness. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.

2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.

3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to switchboards.

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from switchboard units and components.

D. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

E. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Switchboard Nameplates: Label each switchboard compartment with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

C. Device Nameplates: Label each disconnecting and overcurrent protective device and each meter and control device mounted in compartment doors with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."



B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each switchboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

C. Tests and Inspections:




2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Switchboard will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, instrumentation, and accessories.




SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.


A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components. 7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:

PANELBOARDS 262416 - 1





C. Field Quality-Control Reports:


requirements.

D. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments.



1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock. 2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Types:

Two spares for each panelboard.




B. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.



C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

F. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards.

B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NECA 407 and NEMA PB 1.


A. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F to plus 104 deg F. b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.



1.12 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

B. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.

2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.

3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover.

4. Finishes:

a. Panels and Trim: Steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.

b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel.

5. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.

C. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom.

D. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Copper. 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding

conductors; bonded to box.

E. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Copper. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type.



F. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.

G. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

H. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.


A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.


2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS



B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES



B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.











1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).

3. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).

4. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

materials. c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching

fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits.

d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.

e. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in on or off position.

f. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on position.

2.5 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NECA 407 and NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407 and NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."



C. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

D. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

E. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

F. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from recessed panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future.

G. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing.

H. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."




1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.





D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.



3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes.

1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. 2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of

the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.

3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records.

4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions.




SECTION 262713 - ELECTRICITY METERING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes equipment for electricity metering by Owner.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. KY Pulse: Term used by the metering industry to describe a method of measuring consumption of electricity that is based on a relay opening and closing in response to the rotation of the disk in the meter.

B. PC: Personal computer.



B. Shop Drawings: For electricity-metering equipment.

1. Dimensioned plans and sections or elevation layouts. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. Identify terminals and wiring

designations and color-codes to facilitate installation, operation, and maintenance. Indicate recommended types, wire sizes, and circuiting arrangements for field-installed wiring, and show circuit protection features.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Application and operating software documentation. 2. Software licenses.

ELECTRICITY METERING 262713 - 1


3. Software service agreement. 4. Hard copies of manufacturer's operating specifications, design user's guides for software

and hardware, and PDF files on CD-ROM of the hard-copy Submittal.




A. Receive, store, and handle modular meter center according to NECA 400.

1.9 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT

A. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for two years.

B. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new or revised licenses for use of software.

1. Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and to allow Owner to upgrade his computer equipment if necessary.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT FOR ELECTRICITY METERING BY OWNER

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. E-Mon; a division of Hunt Power. 2. National Meter Industries. 3. Osaki Meter Sales, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. General Requirements for Owner's Meters:

1. Comply with UL 1244. 2. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1 minimum, with hasp for padlocking or sealing. 3. Identification: Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical

Systems." 4. Memory Backup: Self-contained to maintain memory throughout power outages of 72

hours, minimum.







5. Sensors: Current-sensing type, with current or voltage output, selected for optimum range and accuracy for meters indicated for this application.

a. Type: Split core. 6. Building Automation System (BAS) Interface: One digital KY pulse to a user-definable

increment of energy measurement. Match signal to BAS input and arrange to convey the instantaneous, integrated, demand level measured by meter to provide data for processing and possible programmed demand control action by destination system.

C. Kilowatt-hour/Demand Meter: Electronic three-phase meters, measuring electricity use and demand. Demand shall be integrated over a 15-minute interval.

1. Voltage and Phase Configuration: Meter shall be designed for use on circuits with voltage rating and phase configuration indicated for its application.

2. Display: LCD with characters not less than 0.25 inch high, indicating accumulative kilowatt-hours, current time and date, current demand, and historic peak demand. Retain accumulated kilowatt-hour and historic peak demand in a nonvolatile memory, until reset.

D. Data Transmission Cable: Transmit KY pulse data over Class 1 control-circuit conductors in raceway. Comply with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with equipment installation requirements in NECA 1.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Series Combination Warning Label: Self-adhesive type, with text as required by NFPA 70.

2. Equipment Identification Labels: Adhesive film labels with clear protective overlay.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

B. Tests and Inspections:



1. Connect a load of known kilowatt rating, 1.5 kW minimum, to a circuit supplied by metered feeder.

2. Turn off circuits supplied by metered feeder and secure them in off condition. 3. Run test load continuously for eight hours minimum, or longer, to obtain a measurable

meter indication. Use test-load placement and setting that ensures continuous, safe operation.

4. Check and record meter reading at end of test period and compare with actual electricity used, based on test-load rating, duration of test, and sample measurements of supply voltage at test-load connection. Record test results.

C. Electricity metering will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.





SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Twist-locking receptacles. 3. Tamper-resistant receptacles. 4. Weather-resistant receptacles. 5. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers. 6. Wall-switch and exterior occupancy sensors. 7. Communications outlets. 8. Pendant cord-connector devices.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:

1. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations. 2. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements. 3. Receptacles for Food Service Equipment: Match plug configurations.



B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.

WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 1





A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing-label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions:

1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire. 2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.

2.3 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; 5351 (single), CR5362 (duplex). b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), HBL5352 (duplex). c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex).


http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=2075&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=04&src=wd










d. Pass & Seymour; 5361 (single), 5362 (duplex).

B. Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498 Supplement sd, and FS W-C-596.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following

a. Cooper; TR8300. b. Hubbell; HBL8300SGA. c. Leviton; 8300-SGG. d. Pass & Seymour; TR63H.

2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description:

1. Straight blade, feed-through type. 2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. 3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer

provides proper GFCI protection.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; VGF20. b. Hubbell; GFR5352L. c. Pass & Seymour; 2095. d. Leviton; 7590.

2.5 PENDANT CORD-CONNECTOR DEVICES

A. Description:

1. Matching, locking-type plug and receptacle body connector. 2. NEMA WD 6 Configurations L5-20P and L5-20R, heavy-duty grade, and FS W-C-596. 3. Body: Nylon, with screw-open, cable-gripping jaws and provision for attaching external

cable grip. 4. External Cable Grip: Woven wire-mesh type made of high-strength, galvanized-steel

wire strand, matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provision designed for corresponding connector.

2.6 CORD AND PLUG SETS

A. Description:

1. Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected.














2. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with green-insulated grounding conductor and ampacity of at least 130 percent of the equipment rating.

3. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection.

2.7 TOGGLE SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) Single Pole:

2) Cooper; AH1221. 3) Hubbell; HBL1221. 4) Leviton; 1221-2. 5) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC1.

6) Two Pole:


11) Three Way:


2.8 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic in Staff areas; 0.05-

inch- thick, anodized aluminum in Food Service and Student areas. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed

and labeled for use in wet and damp locations while-in-use.

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-resistant while-in-use, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.





















2.9 PREFABRICATED MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLIES


1. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. 2. Wiremold/Legrand. 3. Leviton.

B. Description:

1. Two-piece surface metal raceway, with factory-wired multioutlet harness. 2. Components shall be products from single manufacturer designed for use as a complete,

matching assembly of raceways and receptacles.

C. Raceway Material: Metal, with manufacturer's standard finish.

D. Multioutlet Harness:

1. Receptacles: 15-A, 125-V, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-15R receptacles complying with NEMA WD 1, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.

2. Receptacle Spacing: 6 inches (150 mm. 3. Wiring: No. 12 AWG solid, Type THHN copper, two circuit, connecting alternating

receptacles.

2.10 FINISHES

A. Device Color:

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Ivory unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.





3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid

conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw.

6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold

device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on bottom. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required.



3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital

readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit

breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.

C. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.





SECTION 262813 - FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in enclosed switches and enclosed controllers.

2. Spare-fuse cabinets.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material, dimensions, descriptions of individual components, and finishes for spare-fuse cabinets. Include the following for each fuse type indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information: If ratings of fuses have been adjusted to accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses with adjusted ratings.

a. For each fuse having adjusted ratings, include location of fuse, original fuse rating, local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating.

b. Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment calculations are based.

2. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, and ratings.

3. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics. 4. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves

(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse 5. Coordination charts and tables and related data.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Ambient temperature adjustment information. 2. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.

FUSES 262813 - 1


3. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves (instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse

4. Coordination charts and tables and related data.



1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source from single manufacturer.


C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. Comply with UL 248-11 for plug fuses.


A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F or more than 100 deg F, apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size and with system short-circuit current levels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc. 2. Edison Fuse, Inc. 3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc.

FUSES 262813 - 2






4. Littelfuse, Inc.

2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages.

2.3 SPARE-FUSE CABINET

A. Characteristics: Wall-mounted steel unit with full-length, recessed piano-hinged door and key-coded cam lock and pull.

1. Size: Adequate for storage of spare fuses specified with 15 percent spare capacity minimum.

2. Finish: Gray, baked enamel. 3. Identification: "SPARE FUSES" in 1-1/2-inch- high letters on exterior of door. 4. Fuse Pullers: For each size of fuse, where applicable and available, from fuse

manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically damaged.

B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features.

C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.

D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to fuse ratings.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS

A. Cartridge Fuses: 1. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay. 2. Other Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay. 3. Control Circuits: Class CC, time delay.

FUSES 262813 - 3



3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse.

B. Install plug-fuse adapters in Edison-base fuseholders and sockets. Ensure that adapters are irremovable once installed.

C. Install spare-fuse cabinet(s).

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder.


FUSES 262813 - 4


SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. Enclosures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.


A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.



A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate). 4. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 1


5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.

6. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.



B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.






requirements.

D. Manufacturer's field service report.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers.

2. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.






B. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F. 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace switch and breaker parts and products that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES


1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.





3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 800 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with cartridge fuse interiors to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

4. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified. 5. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Two NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate

before switch blades open. 6. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 7. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment. 8. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Remote mounted and powered; 24-V ac.

2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES



B. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 600 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

4. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Two NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open.

5. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 6. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Remote mounted and powered; 24-V ac.









2.3 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 3. Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel. 4. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. 5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

NEMA 250, Type 12.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

D. Install fuses in fusible devices.

E. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.






1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.





3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.


D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.




SECTION 262913 - ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following enclosed controllers rated 600 V and less:

1. Full-voltage manual. 2. Full-voltage magnetic.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CPT: Control power transformer.

B. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.

C. N.C.: Normally closed.

D. N.O.: Normally open.

E. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

F. SCR: Silicon-controlled rectifier.


A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed controllers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.



A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed controller. Include manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and enclosure types and finishes.

ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 - 1


B. Shop Drawings: For each enclosed controller. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, details, and required clearances and service spaces around controller enclosures.

1. Show tabulations of the following:

a. Each installed unit's type and details. b. Factory-installed devices. c. Nameplate legends. d. Short-circuit current rating of integrated unit. e. Listed and labeled for integrated short-circuit current (withstand) rating of OCPDs

in combination controllers by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

f. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual OCPDs in combination controllers.




B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed controllers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.





D. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full-load currents.

E. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor running overload protection suit actual motors to be protected.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed controllers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and installed components. 2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting circuit breaker and MCP trip

settings.



3. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays. 4. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming reduced-

voltage solid-state controllers.

1.8 MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS


1. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

2. Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type.

3. Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed. 4. Auxiliary Contacts: Furnish one spare(s) for each size and type of magnetic controller

installed. 5. Power Contacts: Furnish three spares for each size and type of magnetic contactor

installed.





C. Comply with NFPA 70.

D. IEEE Compliance: Fabricate and test enclosed controllers according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."


A. Store enclosed controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect enclosed controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.

B. If stored in areas subject to weather, cover enclosed controllers to protect them from weather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside controllers;.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:



1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F. 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

1.12 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.

C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

1.13 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace controller parts and products that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FULL-VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS

A. General Requirements for Full-Voltage Controllers: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A.

B. Motor-Starting Switches: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button action; marked to show whether unit is off or on.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following:

a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. b. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. c. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand. d. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. e. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

2. Configuration: Nonreversing. 3. Surface mounting. 4. Red pilot light.

C. Fractional Horsepower Manual Controllers: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped.










2. Configuration: Nonreversing. 3. Overload Relays: Inverse-time-current characteristics; NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 tripping

characteristics; heaters matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor; external reset push button; bimetallic type.

4. Surface mounting. 5. Red pilot light.

D. Integral Horsepower Manual Controllers: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped.



2. Configuration: Nonreversing. 3. Overload Relays: Inverse-time-current characteristics; NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 tripping

characteristics; heaters and sensors in each phase, matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor and having appropriate adjustment for duty cycle; external reset push button; bimetallic type.

4. Surface mounting. 5. Red pilot light. 6. N.O. auxiliary contact.

E. Magnetic Controllers: Full voltage, across the line, electrically held.



2. Configuration: Nonreversing. 3. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type.


















a. Operating Voltage: Depending on contactor NEMA size and line-voltage rating, manufacturer's standard matching control power or line voltage.

4. Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double-break, silver-cadmium oxide; assembled to allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load wiring.

5. Control Circuits: 24-V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary fuses, with CPT of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices.

a. CPT Spare Capacity: 50 VA.

6. Melting Alloy Overload Relays:

a. Inverse-time-current characteristic. b. Class 10 tripping characteristic. c. Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected

motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle.

7. N.C., isolated overload alarm contact. 8. External overload reset push button.

F. Combination Magnetic Controller: Factory-assembled combination of magnetic controller, OCPD, and disconnecting means.



2. Fusible Disconnecting Means:

a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower-rated, fusible switch with clips or bolt pads to accommodate Class R fuses.

b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position.

3. Auxiliary Contacts: N.O./N.C., arranged to activate before switch blades open. 4. Nonfusible Disconnecting Means:

a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower-rated, nonfusible switch. b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed

position. c. Auxiliary Contacts: N.O./N.C., arranged to activate before switch blades open.








2.2 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Controllers: NEMA ICS 6, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R. 3. Kitchen Areas: Type 4X, stainless steel. 4. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: Type 4. 5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

Type 12.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. General Requirements for Control Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.

1. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Standard-duty, oiltight type.

a. Push Buttons: Shielded types; momentary as indicated. b. Pilot Lights: LED types; colors as indicated; push to test. c. Selector Switches: Rotary type.

B. N.C. auxiliary contact(s).

C. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable solid-state time-delay relays.

D. Phase-Failure, Phase-Reversal, and Undervoltage and Overvoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired connections. Provide adjustable undervoltage, overvoltage, and time-delay settings.

E. Breather and drain assemblies, to maintain interior pressure and release condensation in Type 4 enclosures installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and temperature swings.

F. Sun shields installed on fronts, sides, and tops of enclosures installed outdoors and subject to direct and extended sun exposure.

G. Cover gaskets for Type 1 enclosures.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine enclosed controllers before installation. Reject enclosed controllers that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.




3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Wall-Mounted Controllers: Install enclosed controllers on walls with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

B. Seismic Bracing: Comply with requirements specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

D. Install fuses in each fusible-switch enclosed controller.

E. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in Section 262813 "Fuses."

F. Install heaters in thermal overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load amperes after motors have been installed.

G. Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven equipment.

H. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify enclosed controllers, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved nameplate. 3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.

3.4 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between enclosed controllers and remote devices. Comply with requirements in Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."

B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.

C. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control selection devices where applicable.

1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices that have no safety functions when switch is in manual-control position.



2. Connect selector switches with enclosed-controller circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.




1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.



1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation 2. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed-controller element, component, connecting

motor supply, feeder, and control circuits. 3. Test continuity of each circuit. 4. Verify that voltages at controller locations are within plus or minus 10 percent of motor

nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Construction Manager before starting the motor(s).

5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation. 6. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in

NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 7. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.


D. Enclosed controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports including a certified report that identifies enclosed controllers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges.

B. Adjust overload-relay heaters or settings if power factor correction capacitors are connected to the load side of the overload relays.

C. Adjust the trip settings of MCPs and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to six times the motor nameplate full-load ampere ratings and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cooldown between starts. If



tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed eight times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify Construction Manager before increasing settings.

D. Set the taps on reduced-voltage autotransformer controllers at 50 percent.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Replace controllers whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial Completion.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain enclosed controllers.




SECTION 264313 - SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes field-mounted SPDs for low-voltage (120 to 600 V) power distribution and control equipment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Nominal: Nominal discharge current.

B. MCOV: Maximum continuous operating voltage.

C. Mode(s), also Modes of Protection: The pair of electrical connections where the VPR applies.

D. MOV: Metal-oxide varistor; an electronic component with a significant non-ohmic current-voltage characteristic.

E. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

F. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.

G. SPD: Surge protective device.

H. VPR: Voltage protection rating.



1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

2. Copy of UL Category Code VZCA certification, as a minimum, listing the tested values for VPRs, Inominal ratings, MCOVs, type designations, OCPD requirements, model numbers, system voltages, and modes of protection.

SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS

264313 - 1




B. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For SPDs to include in maintenance manuals.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to replace or replace SPDs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL SPD REQUIREMENTS

A. SPD with Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


C. Comply with UL 1449.

D. MCOV of the SPD shall be the nominal system voltage.

2.2 SERVICE ENTRANCE SUPPRESSOR


1. Eaton Corporation. 2. Emerson Electric Co. 3. GE Zenith Controls. 4. LEA International; Protection Technology Group. 5. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. 6. Schneider Electric Industries SAS. 7. Siemens Industry, Inc.

B. SPDs: Comply with UL 1449, Type 1.

1. SPDs with the following features and accessories:


264313 - 2









a. Internal thermal protection that disconnects the SPD before damaging internal suppressor components.

b. Indicator light display for protection status. c. Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one normally

closed, for remote monitoring of protection status. d. Surge counter.

C. Comply with UL 1283.

D. Peak Surge Current Rating: The minimum single-pulse surge current withstand rating per phase shall not be less than 160 kA. The peak surge current rating shall be the arithmetic sum of the ratings of the individual MOVs in a given mode.

E. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for grounded wye circuits with 208Y/120 V, three-phase, four-wire circuits shall not exceed the following:

1. Line to Neutral: 700 V for 208Y/120 V. 2. Line to Ground: 1200 V for 208Y/120 V. 3. Line to Line: 1000 V for 208Y/120 V.

F. SCCR: Equal or exceed 100 kA.

G. Nominal Rating: 20 kA.

2.3 PANEL SUPPRESSORS


1. Eaton Corporation. 2. Emerson Electric Co. 3. GE Zenith Controls. 4. LEA International; Protection Technology Group. 5. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. 6. Schneider Electric Industries SAS. 7. Siemens Industry, Inc.

B. SPDs: Comply with UL 1449, Type 1.

1. Include LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 2. Internal thermal protection that disconnects the SPD before damaging internal suppressor

components. 3. Include Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one normally

closed, for remote monitoring of protection status.

C. Peak Surge Current Rating: The minimum single-pulse surge current withstand rating per phase shall not be less than 80 kA. The peak surge current rating shall be the arithmetic sum of the ratings of the individual MOVs in a given mode.

D. Comply with UL 1283.


264313 - 3









E. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for grounded wye circuits with 208Y/120 V, three-phase, four-wire circuits shall not exceed the following:

1. Line to Neutral: 700 V for 208Y/120 V. 2. Line to Ground: 700 V for 208Y/120 V. 3. Neutral to Ground: 700 V for 208Y/120 V. 4. Line to Line: 1200 V for 208Y/120 V

F. SCCR: Equal or exceed 80 kA.

G. Nominal Rating: 20 kA.

2.4 ENCLOSURES

A. Indoor Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1.


A. Power Wiring: Same size as SPD leads, complying with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Class 2 Control Cables: Multiconductor cable with copper conductors not smaller than No. 18 AWG, complying with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Class 1 Control Cables: Multiconductor cable with copper conductors not smaller than No. 14 AWG, complying with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Install an OCPD or disconnect as required to comply with the UL listing of the SPD.

C. Install SPDs with conductors between suppressor and points of attachment as short and straight as possible, and adjust circuit-breaker positions to achieve shortest and straightest leads. Do not splice and extend SPD leads unless specifically permitted by manufacturer. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended lead length. Do not bond neutral and ground.

D. Use crimped connectors and splices only. Wire nuts are unacceptable.

E. Wiring:

1. Power Wiring: Comply with wiring methods in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."


264313 - 4


2. Controls: Comply with wiring methods in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.

1. Compare equipment nameplate data for compliance with Drawings and Specifications. 2. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances. 3. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's written installation

requirements.

B. An SPD will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.3 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Do not perform insulation-resistance tests of the distribution wiring equipment with SPDs installed. Disconnect SPDs before conducting insulation-resistance tests, and reconnect them immediately after the testing is over.

C. Energize SPDs after power system has been energized, stabilized, and tested.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to operate and maintain SPDs.



264313 - 5


SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. 2. Emergency lighting units. 3. Exit signs. 4. Lighting fixture supports.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 260923 "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors.

2. Section 262726 "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent lamps.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BF: Ballast factor.

B. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

C. CRI: Color-rendering index.

D. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

E. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

F. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.

G. LED: Light-Emitting-Diode


A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 1


1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger. 3. Ballast, including BF, or Driver. 4. Energy-efficiency data. 5. Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data for lamps. 6. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with

IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project.

a. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining fixtures shall be certified by manufacturer.

b. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.


C. Installation instructions.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast or driver for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, from manufacturer.


D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.





1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

2. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

3. Ballasts and Drivers: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

4. Globes and Guards: One for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.


C. Comply with NFPA 70.

D. FM Global Compliance: Lighting fixtures for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining nine years.

2. Warranty Period for Self-Powered Exit Sign Batteries: Seven years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining six years.



B Special Warranty for Lighting Fixtures: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of lighting fixtures agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Lighting fixtures: 1 year from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, product(s) indicated on Drawings].

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS

A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.

B. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.

C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

D. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

E. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

F. Diffusers and Globes:

1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated. b. UV stabilized.

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.

G. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.

1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:

a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type.



b. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12, etc.), tube configuration (twin, quad, triple, etc.), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

c. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start, etc.) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

d. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

2.3 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. General Requirements for Electronic Ballasts:

1. Comply with UL 935 and with ANSI C82.11. 2. Designed for type and quantity of lamps served. 3. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless another BF, dimmer, or bi-level

control is indicated. 4. Sound Rating: Class A. 5. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better. 7. Operating Frequency: 42 kHz or higher. 8. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 9. BF: 0.88 or higher. 10. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. 11. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts shall comply with ANSI C82.11 and shall

be connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail. 12. Warranty: 5 years from date of acceptance.

B. Luminaires controlled by occupancy sensors shall have programmed-start ballasts.

C. Electronic Programmed-Start Ballasts for T5 and T8 Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11 and the following:

1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit for T5 diameter lamps. 2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.

D. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1; energy saving, high-power factor, Class P, and having automatic-reset thermal protection.

1. Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label.

E. Single Ballasts for Multiple Lighting Fixtures: Factory wired with ballast arrangements and bundled extension wiring to suit final installation conditions without modification or rewiring in the field.

F. Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments:

1. Temperatures 0 Deg F and Higher: Electronic type rated for 0 deg F starting and operating temperature with indicated lamp types.

2. Temperatures Minus 20 Deg F and Higher: Electromagnetic type designed for use with indicated lamp types.



G. Ballasts and drivers for Dimmer-Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type.

1. Dimming Range: 100 to 5 percent of rated lamp lumens. 2. Ballast Input Watts: Can be reduced to 20 percent of normal. 3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control system

and lamp type indicated. 4. Control: Coordinate wiring from ballast to control device to ensure that the ballast,

controller, and connecting wiring are compatible.

H. Ballasts for Bi-Level Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type.

1. Operating Modes: Ballast circuit and leads provide for remote control of the light output of the associated lamp between high- and low-level and off.

a. High-Level Operation: 100 percent of rated lamp lumens. b. Low-Level Operation: 30 percent of rated lamp lumens.

2. Ballast shall provide equal current to each lamp in each operating mode. 3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific bi-level control system and

lamp type indicated.

2.4 BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. Description: Electronic-programmed rapid-start type, complying with UL 935 and with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated:

1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. 3. Sound Rating: Class A. 4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better. 6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 8. BF: 0.95 or higher unless otherwise indicated. 9. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. 10. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on

electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.

2.5 EXIT SIGNS

A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Internally Lighted Signs:

1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 2. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained

power pack.



a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. c. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage

drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

f. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

2.6 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS

A. General Requirements for Emergency Lighting Units: Self-contained units complying with UL 924.

1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type. 2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. 3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops to

80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

4. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

5. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

6. Wire Guard: Heavy-chrome-plated wire guard protects lamp heads or fixtures. 7. Integral Time-Delay Relay: Holds unit on for fixed interval of 15 minutes when power is

restored after an outage. 8. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-

required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

2.7 FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches, 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.

B. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches, 1300 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.



C. T5 rapid-start lamps, rated 28 W maximum, nominal length of 45.2 inches, 2900 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 3500K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.

D. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500K, average rated life of 10,000 hours at three hours operation per start unless otherwise indicated.

1. 13 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 900 initial lumens (minimum). 2. 18 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1200 initial lumens (minimum). 3. 26 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1800 initial lumens (minimum). 4. 32 W: T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum). 5. 42 W: T4, triple tube, rated 3200 initial lumens (minimum). 6. 57 W: T4, triple tube, rated 4300 initial lumens (minimum). 7. 70 W: T4, triple tube, rated 5200 initial lumens (minimum).

2.8 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture.

C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.

D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.

E. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12 gage.

F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

2.9 LED LAMPS

A. LED Lamps: High performance white LED’s, CRI 75 (minimum), CCT color temperature 3500K, and average rated life of 70,000 hours with not less than 70% of original brightness (lumen maintenance), rated at 25 degrees C.

1. The LED driver shall be securely mounted inside the

fixture for optimized driver performance and longevity. 2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F (Minus 30 deg C). 3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F (40 deg C). 4. The driver shall have overload as well as short circuit protection. 5. The driver shall be a DC voltage output, constant current design, 50/60HZ. 6. The driver shall have a minimum efficiency of 90%.



7. The driver shall be rated at full load with THD<20% and a power factor of great-er than 0.90.

8. The driver shall contain over-heat protection which reduces output to less than half rating if the case temperature reaches 85°C.

2.10 DRIVERS FOR LED LAMPS

A. Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029 and capable of open-circuit operation without reduction of average lamp life. Include the following features unless otherwise indicated:


fixture for optimized driver performance and longevity. 2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F (Minus 30 deg C). 3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F (40 deg C). 4. The driver shall have overload as well as short circuit protection. 5. The driver shall be a DC voltage output, constant current design, 50/60HZ. 6. The driver shall have a minimum efficiency of 90%. 7. The driver shall be rated at full load with THD<20% and a power factor of

greater than 0.90. 8. The driver shall contain over-heat protection which reduces output to less

than half rating if the case temperature reaches 85°C.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lighting fixtures:

1. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install lamps in each luminaire.

B. Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Architect, to use permanent luminaires for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary. When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall.

C. Lay-in Ceiling Lighting Fixtures Supports: Use grid as a support element.

1. Install ceiling support system rods or wires, independent of the ceiling suspension devices, for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches from lighting fixture corners.

2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.

3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.

4. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3.



D. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. 3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for

suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. 4. Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to

building structure.

E. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.

B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy by Owner. Burn-in fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps intended to be dimmed, for at least 100 hours at full voltage.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting aimable luminaires to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. Some of this work may be required after dark.

1. Adjust aimable luminaires in the presence of Owner.




SECTION 265600 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts. 2. Luminaire-mounted photoelectric relays. 3. Poles and accessories.


1. Section 265100 "Interior Lighting" for exterior luminaires normally mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

B. CRI: Color-rendering index.

C. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

D. LED: Light Emitting Diode.

E. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.

F. Pole: Luminaire support structure, including tower used for large area illumination.

G. Standard: Same definition as "Pole" above.

1.4 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS CRITERIA FOR POLE SELECTION

A. Dead Load: Weight of luminaire and its horizontal and vertical supports, lowering devices, and supporting structure, applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M.

B. Live Load: Single load of 500 lbf, distributed as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M.

C. Ice Load: Load of 3 lbf/sq. ft., applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M Ice Load Map.

EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 1


D. Wind Load: Pressure of wind on pole and luminaire and banners and banner arms, calculated and applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M.

1. Basic wind speed for calculating wind load for poles 50 feet high or less is 90 mph.

a. Wind Importance Factor: 1.0. b. Minimum Design Life: 25 years. c. Velocity Conversion Factors: 1.0.


A. Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of lighting unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of luminaire, including materials, dimensions, effective projected area, and verification of indicated parameters.

2. Details of attaching luminaires and accessories. 3. Details of installation and construction. 4. Luminaire materials. 5. Photometric data based on laboratory tests of each luminaire type, complete with

indicated lamps, ballasts, and accessories.

a. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated luminaires, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining luminaires shall be certified by manufacturer.

b. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

6. Photoelectric relays. 7. Ballasts and drivers, including energy-efficiency data. 8. Lamps, including life, output, CCT, CRI, lumens, and energy-efficiency data. 9. Materials, dimensions, and finishes of poles. 10. Means of attaching luminaires to supports, and indication that attachment is suitable for

components involved. 11. Anchor bolts for poles. 12. Manufactured pole foundations.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Anchor-bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer. 3. Design calculations, certified by a qualified professional engineer, indicating strength of

screw foundations and soil conditions on which they are based. 4. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.




A. Pole and Support Component Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of poles, certifying that products are designed for indicated load requirements in AASHTO LTS-4-M and that load imposed by luminaire and attachments has been included in design. The certification shall be based on design calculations by a professional engineer.

B. Qualification Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.


D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and poles to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



1. Lamps: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

2. Glass and Plastic Lenses, Covers, and Other Optical Parts: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

3. Ballasts and Drivers: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

4. Globes and Guards: One for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.


C. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."

D. Comply with NFPA 70.




A. Store poles on decay-resistant-treated skids at least 12 inches above grade and vegetation. Support poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation.

B. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on metal poles until right before pole installation. For poles with nonmetallic finishes, handle with web fabric straps.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship; that corrode; or that fade, stain, perforate, erode, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar radiation within specified warranty period. Manufacturer may exclude lightning damage, hail damage, vandalism, abuse, or unauthorized repairs or alterations from special warranty coverage.

1. Warranty Period for Luminaires: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Metal Corrosion: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Warranty Period for Color Retention: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 4. Warranty Period for Poles: Repair or replace lighting poles and standards that fail in

finish, materials, and workmanship within manufacturer's standard warranty period, but not less than five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, product(s) indicated on Drawings.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LUMINAIRES

A. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet locations by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. LER Tests Fluorescent Fixtures: Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.

2. LER Tests LED Fixtures: Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B.

B. Lateral Light Distribution Patterns: Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for luminaires.

C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

D. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.



E. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.

F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens.

G. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel.

H. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

I. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field.

J. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.

K. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.

L. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support materials.

M. Factory-Applied Finish for Steel Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."

2. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel.

a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard catalog of colors.

N. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.

1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:

a. "USES ONLY" and include specific lamp type.



b. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12), tube configuration (twin, quad, triple), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

c. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for HID luminaires.

d. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

e. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires. f. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

2.3 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS AND LAMPS

A. Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments:

1. Temperatures 0 Deg F and Higher: Electronic type rated for 0 deg F starting and operating temperature with indicated lamp types.

2. Temperatures Minus 20 Deg F and Higher: Electromagnetic type designed for use with indicated lamp types.

B. Ballast Characteristics:

1. Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum. 2. Sound Rating: Class A. 3. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 4. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1, energy-saving, high power factor,

Class P, automatic-reset thermal protection. 5. Case Temperature for Compact Lamp Ballasts: 65 deg C, maximum. 6. Transient-Voltage Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2,

Category A or better.

C. Low-Temperature Lamp Capability: Rated for reliable starting and operation with ballast provided at temperatures minus 20 deg F and higher.

2.4 DRIVERS FOR LED LAMPS

A. Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029 and capable of open-circuit operation without reduction of average lamp life. Include the following features unless otherwise indicated:


fixture for optimized driver performance and longevity. 2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F. 3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F. 4. The driver shall have overload as well as short circuit protection. 5. The driver shall be a DC voltage output, constant current design, 50/60HZ. 6. The driver shall have a minimum efficiency of 90%. 7. The driver shall be rated at full load with THD<20% and a power factor of

greater than 0.90. 8. The driver shall contain over-heat protection which reduces output to less

than half rating if the case temperature reaches 85°C.



9. The LED driver assembly shall have easy tool-less access using twist lock components.

10. The LED driver shall be supplied with a quick-disconnect electrical connector on the power supply.

2.5 LED LAMPS

A. LED Lamps: High performance white LED’s, CRI 75 (minimum), CCT color temperature 4000K, and average rated life of 70,000 hours with not less than 70% of original brightness (lumen maintenance), rated at 25 degrees C.

1. The luminaire shall have a minimum 3555 initial delivered lumen rating when operated at steady state with an average ambient temperature of 25°C (77°F).

2. The LED arrays shall be built in series-parallel circuits which maintain overall light output in the event of single LED failures.

3. The LEDs and LED driver shall operate over a -40°C (-40°F) to +50°C (122°F) ambient air temperature range.

4. The luminaire shall be provided with individual, acrylic, refractor type optics applied to each LED.

5. The luminaire shall provide Type III light distribution per the IESNA classifications. Testing shall be done in accordance with IESNA LM-79-08.

6. The LEDs shall be mounted in arrays, on printed circuit boards designed to maximize heat transfer to the heat sink surface.

7. The LEDs shall be attached to the printed circuit board with not less than 90% pure silver to insure optimal electrical and thermal conductivity.

8. The LEDs and printed circuit boards shall be protected from moisture and corrosion by a conformal coating of 1 to 3 mils.

9. The LEDs and printed circuit board construction shall be environmentally friendly and 100% recyclable. They shall not contain lead, mercury or any other hazardous substances and shall be RoHS compliant.

2.6 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLES AND SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS-4-M.

1. Wind-Load Strength of Poles: Adequate at indicated heights above grade without failure, permanent deflection, or whipping in steady winds of speed indicated in "Structural Analysis Criteria for Pole Selection" Article.

2. Strength Analysis: For each pole, multiply the actual equivalent projected area of luminaires and brackets by a factor of 1.1 to obtain the equivalent projected area to be used in pole selection strength analysis.



B. Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting requirements. Use stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts unless otherwise indicated.

C. Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion-resistant items compatible with support components.

1. Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points. 2. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot-dip galvanized after

fabrication unless otherwise indicated. 3. Anchor-Bolt Template: Plywood or steel.

D. Handhole: Oval-shaped, with minimum clear opening of 2-1/2 by 5 inches, with cover secured by stainless-steel captive screws.

E. Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole-base flange. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

2.7 STEEL POLES

A. Poles: Comply with ASTM A 500, Grade B, carbon steel with a minimum yield of 46,000 psig; one-piece construction up to 40 feet in height with access handhole in pole wall.

1. Shape: Round, straight. 2. Mounting Provisions: Butt flange for bolted mounting on foundation support.

B. Steel Mast Arms: Single-arm type, continuously welded to pole attachment plate. Material and finish same as pole.

C. Pole-Top Tenons: Fabricated to support luminaire or luminaires and brackets indicated, and securely fastened to pole top.

D. Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 1/2-inch threaded lug, complying with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems," listed for attaching grounding and bonding conductors of type and size listed in that Section, and accessible through handhole.

E. Factory-Painted Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or with SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."

2. Interior Surfaces of Pole: One coat of bituminous paint, or otherwise treat for equal corrosion protection.

3. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel.

a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.



2.8 POLE ACCESSORIES

A. Base Covers: Manufacturers' standard metal units, arranged to cover pole's mounting bolts and nuts. Finish same as pole.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION

A. Install lamps in each luminaire.

B. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports.

1. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer.

C. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. Include adjustment of photoelectric device to prevent false operation of relay by artificial light sources, favoring a north orientation.

3.2 POLE INSTALLATION

A. Alignment: Align pole foundations and poles for optimum directional alignment of luminaires and their mounting provisions on the pole.

B. Clearances: Maintain the following minimum horizontal distances of poles from surface and underground features unless otherwise indicated on Drawings:

1. Fire Hydrants and Storm Drainage Piping: 60 inches. 2. Water, Gas, Electric, Communication, and Sewer Lines: 10 feet. 3. Trees: 15 feet from tree trunk.

C. Concrete Pole Foundations: Set anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt templates furnished by pole manufacturer. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing requirements are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

D. Foundation-Mounted Poles: Mount pole with leveling nuts, and tighten top nuts to torque level recommended by pole manufacturer.

1. Use anchor bolts and nuts selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer.

2. Grout void between pole base and foundation. Use nonshrink or expanding concrete grout firmly packed to fill space.

3. Install base covers unless otherwise indicated. 4. Use a short piece of 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter pipe to make a drain hole through

grout. Arrange to drain condensation from interior of pole.

E. Poles and Pole Foundations Set in Concrete Paved Areas: Install poles with minimum of 6-inch- wide, unpaved gap between the pole or pole foundation and the edge of adjacent concrete slab. Fill unpaved ring with pea gravel to a level 1 inch below top of concrete slab.



F. Raise and set poles using web fabric slings (not chain or cable).

3.3 BOLLARD LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION

A. Align units for optimum directional alignment of light distribution.

B. Install on concrete base with top 4 inches above finished grade or surface at bollard location. Cast conduit into base, and shape base to match shape of bollard base. Finish by troweling and rubbing smooth. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3.4 EARTHWORK





3.5 CORROSION PREVENTION

A. Steel Conduits: Comply with Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch- thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50 percent overlap.

3.6 GROUNDING

A. Ground metal poles and support structures according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

1. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to grounding

system.


A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

B. Illumination Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires and energizing circuits with normal power source.



1. Verify operation of photoelectric controls.

C. Illumination Tests:

1. Measure light intensities at night. Use photometers with calibration referenced to NIST standards. Comply with the following IESNA testing guide(s):

a. IESNA LM-5, "Photometric Measurements of Area and Sports Lighting Installations."

b. IESNA LM-50, "Photometric Measurements of Roadway Lighting Installations." c. IESNA LM-52, "Photometric Measurements of Roadway Sign Installations." d. IESNA LM-64, "Photometric Measurements of Parking Areas." e. IESNA LM-72, "Directional Positioning of Photometric Data."

D. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.




SECTION 280513 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fire alarm wire and cable. 2. Identification products.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.

B. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

C. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.

D. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control and signaling power-limited circuits.

E. Open Cabling: Passing telecommunications cabling through open space (e.g., between the studs of a wall cavity).

F. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.



1. For coaxial cable, include the following installation data for each type used:

a. Nominal OD. b. Minimum bending radius. c. Maximum pulling tension.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector.

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280513 - 1


B. Source quality-control reports.



A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing.


A. Do not install conductors and cables that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

1. Indications that wire and cables are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration and sagging of factory packing materials.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.


2.2 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE


1. Comtran Corporation. 2. Draka Cableteq USA. 3. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc. 4. Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable Corp. 5. West Penn Wire.








B. General Wire and Cable Requirements: NRTL listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, Article 760.

C. Signaling Line Circuits: Twisted, shielded pair, No. 18 AWG.

1. Circuit Integrity Cable: Twisted shielded pair, NFPA 70, Article 760, Classification CI, for power-limited fire alarm signal service Type FPL. NRTL listed and labeled as complying with UL 1424 and UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.

D. Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color-coded insulation.

1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum. 2. Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum. 3. Multiconductor Armored Cable: NFPA 70, Type MC, copper conductors,

Type TFN/THHN conductor insulation, copper drain wire, copper armor with red identifier stripe, NTRL listed for fire alarm and cable tray installation, plenum rated, and complying with requirements in UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.

2.3 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS


1. Brady Worldwide, Inc. 2. HellermannTyton North America. 3. Kroy LLC. 4. Panduit Corp.

B. Comply with UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables.

B. Factory sweep test coaxial cables at frequencies from 5 MHz to 1 GHz. Sweep test shall test the frequency response, or attenuation over frequency, of a cable by generating a voltage whose frequency is varied through the specified frequency range and graphing the results.

C. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.








PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for installation of supports for cables.

3.2 WIRING METHOD

A. Install wiring in metal pathways and wireways.

1. Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4 inch. Control and data transmission wiring shall not share conduit with other building wiring systems.

2. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

B. Install cable, concealed in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors when possible.

C. Wiring within Enclosures:

1. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii.

2. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. 3. Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended in writing by

manufacturer. 4. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of enclosure. 5. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure

associated with intrusion system to terminal blocks. 6. Mark each terminal according to system's wiring diagrams. 7. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal

blocks, or plug connectors.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES


B. Conductors: Size according to system manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.

C. General Requirements for Cabling:

1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." 3. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make

terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and patch panels. 4. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches

and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.



5. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

6. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.

7. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating.

8. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions.

3.4 FIRE ALARM WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NFPA 72.

B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. 2. Fire alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system

shall be installed in a dedicated raceway system. This system shall not be used for any other wire or cable.

C. Wiring Method:

1. Cables and raceways used for fire alarm circuits, and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system, may not contain any other wire or cable.

2. Fire-Rated Cables: Use of 2-hour, fire-rated fire alarm cables, NFPA 70, Types MI and CI, is not permitted.

3. Signaling Line Circuits: Power-limited fire alarm cables may be installed in the same cable or raceway as signaling line circuits.

D. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.

E. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, cabinets, or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.

F. Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and another for supervisory circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red.



G. Wiring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: 1-inch conduit between the fire alarm control panel and the transmitter. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for connecting wiring as needed to suit monitoring function.

3.5 POWER AND CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS

A. 120-V Power Wiring: Install according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" unless otherwise indicated.

B. Minimum Conductor Sizes:

1. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits, No. 14 AWG. 2. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control and signal circuits, No. 16 AWG. 3. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm and signal circuits, No. 12 AWG.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 283111 "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables.

3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

B. Comply with TIA-569-B, "Firestopping" Annex A.

C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.

3.8 GROUNDING

A. For communications wiring, comply with J-STD-607-A and with BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter.

B. For low-voltage wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

3.9 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."





B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components.

D. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide, or transfer the data from the instrument to the computer, save as text files, print, and submit.

E. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.




SECTION 283111 - DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Fire alarm panel, annunciator and devices shall be new and from same manufacturer.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fire-alarm control unit. 2. System smoke detectors. 3. Air-sampling smoke detectors. 4. Heat detectors. 5. Notification appliances. 6. Device guards. 7. Magnetic door holders. 8. Remote annunciator. 9. Addressable interface device. 10. Digital alarm communicator transmitter. 11. Network communications. 12. Manual fire alarm boxes.


1. Section 280513 "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security" for cables and conductors for fire-alarm systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing.

B. FACP: Fire Alarm Control Panel.

C. HLI: High Level Interface.

D. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.

E. PC: Personal computer.

F. VESDA: Very Early Smoke-Detection Apparatus.

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 1



A. Product Data: For each type of product, including furnished options and accessories.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions, profiles, and finishes. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and electrical characteristics.

B. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system.

1. Comply with recommendations and requirements in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 3. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and locations. Indicate conductor sizes, indicate termination locations and requirements, and distinguish between factory and field wiring.

4. Detail assembly and support requirements. 5. Include voltage drop calculations for notification-appliance circuits. 6. Include battery-size calculations. 7. Include input/output matrix. 8. Include statement from manufacturer that all equipment and components have been tested

as a system and meet all requirements in this Specification and in NFPA 72. 9. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector. 10. Verify that each duct detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature,

and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating. 11. Provide program report showing that air-sampling detector pipe layout balances

pneumatically within the airflow range of the air-sampling detector. 12. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts,

drawn to scale; coordinate location of duct smoke detectors and access to them.

a. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators.

b. Show field wiring required for HVAC unit shutdown on alarm. c. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations. d. Show air-sampling detector pipe routing.

13. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits and point-to-point wiring diagrams.

C. General Submittal Requirements:

1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to Architect.

2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:

a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design. b. NICET-certified, fire-alarm technician; Level III minimum. c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For notification appliances and smoke and heat detectors, in addition to submittals listed above, indicate compliance with performance requirements and



design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Drawings showing the location of each notification appliance and smoke and heat detector, ratings of each, and installation details as needed to comply with listing conditions of the device.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting the spacing and sensitivity of detection, complying with NFPA 72. Calculate spacing and intensities for strobe signals and sound-pressure levels for audible appliances.

3. Indicate audible appliances required to produce square wave signal per NFPA 72.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For fire-alarm control unit, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.





1.6 Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

a. Comply with the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

b. Provide "Fire Alarm and Emergency Communications System Record of Completion Documents" according to the "Completion Documents" Article in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.

c. Complete wiring diagrams showing connections between all devices and equipment. Each conductor shall be numbered at every junction point with indication of origination and termination points.

d. Riser diagram. e. Device addresses.



f. Air-sampling system sample port locations and modeling program report showing layout meets performance criteria.

g. Record copy of site-specific software. h. Provide "Inspection and Testing Form" according to the "Inspection, Testing and

Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72, and include the following:

1) Equipment tested. 2) Frequency of testing of installed components. 3) Frequency of inspection of installed components. 4) Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance. 5) Manufacturer's user training manuals.

i. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements. j. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit and each

annunciator unit.

B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.



1. Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than one unit.

2. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than one unit.

3. Smoke Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than one unit of each type.

4. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to two percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than one unit of each type.

5. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked or tamperproofed components. 6. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: One of each type installed. 7. Fuses: Two of each type installed in the system. Provide in a box or cabinet with

compartments marked with fuse types and sizes. 8. Filters for Air-Sampling Detectors: Quantity equal to [two] <Insert number> percent of

amount of each type installed, but no fewer than one unit of each type.


A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.



B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm Level III technician.

C. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by an NRTL (nationally recognized testing laboratory).

D. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by a UL-listed alarm company.

E. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 in the form of a placard by an FM Global-approved alarm company.


A. Perform a full test of the existing system prior to starting work. Document any equipment or components not functioning as designed.

B. Interruption of Existing Fire-Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire-alarm service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary guard service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of fire-alarm service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of fire-alarm service without Construction Manager's written permission.

C. Use of Devices during Construction: Protect devices during construction unless devices are placed in service to protect the facility during construction.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire-alarm system equipment and components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Extent: All equipment and components not covered in the Maintenance Service Agreement.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Components shall be compatible with, and operate as an extension of, existing system. Provide system manufacturer's certification that all components provided have been tested as, and will operate as, a system.

B. Noncoded, UL-certified addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission and horn/strobe evacuation.



C. Automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors.

D. All components provided shall be listed for use with the selected system.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION

A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and systems:

1. Heat detectors. 2. Smoke detectors. 3. Duct smoke detectors. 4. Automatic sprinkler system water flow. 5. Kitchen Ansul Systems. 6. Manual stations.

B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:

1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances. 2. Identify alarm and specific initiating device at fire-alarm control unit, connected network

control panels, off-premises network control panels, and remote annunciators]. 3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station. 4. Activate alarm communication system. 5. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems. 6. Activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies. 7. Record events in the system memory.

C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Valve supervisory switch. 2. User disabling of zones or individual devices. 3. Loss of communication with any panel on the network.

D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits. 2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating

devices. 3. Loss of communication with any addressable sensor, input module, relay, control

module, remote annunciator, printer interface, or Ethernet module. 4. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit. 5. Ground or a single break in internal circuits of fire-alarm control unit. 6. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit. 7. Break in standby battery circuitry. 8. Failure of battery charging. 9. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator.

E. System Supervisory Signal Actions:



1. Initiate notification appliances. 2. Identify specific device initiating the event at fire-alarm control unit, connected network

control panels, off-premises network control panels, and remote annunciators. 3. After a time delay of 200 seconds, transmit a trouble or supervisory signal to the remote

alarm receiving station. 4. Transmit system status to building management system.


A. Seismic Performance: Fire-alarm control unit and raceways shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.


2.4 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Notifier. 2. Bosch Security Systems. 3. Faraday. 4. Fike Corporation. 5. Fire-Lite Alarms. 6. GAMEWELL. 7. GE UTC Fire & Security; A United Technologies Company. 8. Keltron Corporation. 9. Mircom Technologies, Ltd. 10. Siemens Industry, Inc.; Fire Safety Division. 11. Silent Knight. 12. SimplexGrinnell LP. 13. Stanley CSS.

B. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit:

1. Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, modular, power-limited design with electronic modules, complying with UL 864.

a. System software and programs shall be held in nonvolatile flash, electrically erasable, programmable, read-only memory, retaining the information through failure of primary and secondary power supplies.

b. Include a real-time clock for time annotation of events on the event recorder and printer.

c. Provide communication between the FACP and remote circuit interface panels, annunciators, and displays.

d. The FACP shall be listed for connection to a central-station signaling system service.















e. Provide nonvolatile memory for system database, logic, and operating system and event history. The system shall require no manual input to initialize in the event of a complete power down condition. The FACP shall provide a minimum 500-event history log.

2. Addressable Initiation Device Circuits: The FACP shall indicate which communication zones have been silenced and shall provide selective silencing of alarm notification appliance by building communication zone.

3. Addressable Control Circuits for Operation of Notification Appliances and Mechanical Equipment: The FACP shall be listed for releasing service.

C. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at fire-alarm control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and control menu.

1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, 80 characters, minimum. 2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control

commands.

D. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at fire-alarm control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and control menu.

1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, two line(s) of 40 characters, minimum. 2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control

commands and to indicate control commands to be entered into the system for control of smoke-detector sensitivity and other parameters.

E. Initiating-Device, Notification-Appliance, and Signaling-Line Circuits:

1. Pathway Class Designations: NFPA 72, Class A. 2. Pathway Survivability: Level 1. 3. Install no more than 50 addressable devices on each signaling-line circuit. 4. Serial Interfaces:

a. One dedicated RS 485 port for remote station operation using point ID DACT. b. One RS 485 port for remote annunciators, Ethernet module, or multi-interface

module (printer port). c. One USB port for PC configuration. d. One RS 232 port for VESDA HLI connection.

F. Smoke-Alarm Verification:

1. Initiate audible and visible indication of an "alarm-verification" signal at fire-alarm control unit.

2. Activate an approved "alarm-verification" sequence at fire-alarm control unit and detector.

3. Sound general alarm if the alarm is verified. 4. Cancel fire-alarm control unit indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified.



G. Notification-Appliance Circuit:

1. Audible appliances shall sound in a three-pulse temporal pattern, as defined in NFPA 72. 2. Where notification appliances provide signals to sleeping areas, the alarm signal shall be

a 520-Hz square wave with an intensity 15 dB above the average ambient sound level or 5 dB above the maximum sound level, or at least 75 dBA, whichever is greater, measured at the pillow.

3. Visual alarm appliances shall flash in synchronization where multiple appliances are in the same field of view, as defined in NFPA 72.

H. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote alarm station.

I. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory signals supervisory and digital alarm communicator transmitters shall be powered by 24-V dc source.

1. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power-supply module rating.

J. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and automatic transfer switch.

1. Batteries: Sealed lead calcium.

K. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.

2.5 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Notifier. 2. Bosch Security Systems. 3. Faraday. 4. Fike Corporation. 5. Fire-Lite Alarms. 6. GAMEWELL. 7. GE UTC Fire & Security; A United Technologies Company. 8. Keltron Corporation. 9. Mircom Technologies, Ltd. 10. Siemens Industry, Inc.; Fire Safety Division. 11. Silent Knight. 12. SimplexGrinnell LP 13. Stanley CSS.















B. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:

1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal. 2. Detectors shall be two-wire type. 3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,

or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. 4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a

twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring.

5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation.

6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type, indicating detector has operated and power-on status.

C. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.

2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector:

a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

D. Ionization Smoke Detector:



a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

E. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A.



a. Primary status. b. Device type.



c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

3. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listed for use with the supplied detector for smoke detection in HVAC system ducts.

4. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity. 5. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific

duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied. 6. Relay Fan Shutdown: Fully programmable relay rated to interrupt fan motor-control

circuit.

2.6 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Notifier. 2. Bosch Security Systems. 3. Faraday. 4. Fike Corporation. 5. Fire-Lite Alarms. 6. GAMEWELL. 7. GE UTC Fire & Security; A United Technologies Company. 8. Keltron Corporation. 9. Mircom Technologies, Ltd. 10. Siemens Industry, Inc.; Fire Safety Division. 11. Silent Knight. 12. SimplexGrinnell LP 13. Stanley CSS.

B. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Individually addressed, connected to a signaling-line circuit, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections.

C. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification-appliance signal circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections.

1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections.

D. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test protocol.

E. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights complying with UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch- high letters on the lens.















1. Rated Light Output: a. 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field.

2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated. 3. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined

with guards in place. 4. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units. 5. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals. 6. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, red.

2.7 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR

A. Description: Annunciator functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit for alarm, supervisory, and trouble indications. Manual switching functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit, including acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing.

1. Mounting: Flush cabinet, NEMA 250, Type 1.

B. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display and LED indicating lights shall match those of fire-alarm control unit. Provide controls to acknowledge, silence, reset, and test functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals.

2.8 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE

A. General:

1. Include address-setting means on the module. 2. Store an internal identifying code for control panel use to identify the module type. 3. Listed for controlling HVAC fan motor controllers.

B. Monitor Module: Microelectronic module providing a system address for alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.

C. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal.

1. Allow the control panel to switch the relay contacts on command. 2. Have a minimum of two normally open and two normally closed contacts available for

field wiring.

D. Control Module:

1. Operate notification devices. 2. Operate solenoids for use in sprinkler service.

2.9 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER

A. Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote central station and shall comply with UL 632.



B. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from fire-alarm control unit and automatically capture one telephone line(s) and dial a preset number for a remote central station. When contact is made with central station(s), signals shall be transmitted. If service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, transmitter shall initiate a local trouble signal and transmit the signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station over the remaining line. Transmitter shall automatically report telephone service restoration to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, transmitter shall initiate the local trouble signal.

C. Local functions and display at the digital alarm communicator transmitter shall include the following:

1. Verification that both telephone lines are available. 2. Programming device. 3. LED display. 4. Manual test report function and manual transmission clear indication. 5. Communications failure with the central station or fire-alarm control unit.

D. Digital data transmission shall include the following:

1. Address of the alarm-initiating device. 2. Address of the supervisory signal. 3. Address of the trouble-initiating device. 4. Loss of ac supply. 5. Loss of power. 6. Low battery. 7. Abnormal test signal. 8. Communication bus failure.

E. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger.

F. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station.

2.10 NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS

A. Provide network communications for existing network Notifier fire-alarm system according to fire-alarm manufacturer's written requirements, including, but not limited to, multi-mode 8 channel contact closure receiver and transmitter.

B. Provide network communications pathway per manufacturer's written requirements and requirements in NFPA 72 and NFPA 70.

C. Provide integration gateway using BACnet for connection to building automation system.

2.11 DEVICE GUARDS

A. Description: Welded wire mesh of size and shape for the manual station, smoke detector, gong, or other device requiring protection.



1. Factory fabricated and furnished by device manufacturer. 2. Finish: Paint of color to match the protected device.

2.12 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES


1. AMSECO - A Potter Brand. 2. Bosch Security Systems. 3. Cooper Wheelock. 4. Faraday. 5. Federal Signal Corporation. 6. Fike Corporation. 7. Fire-Lite Alarms. 8. GAMEWELL. 9. GE UTC Fire & Security; A United Technologies Company. 10. Keltron Corporation. 11. Mircom Technologies, Ltd. 12. Notifier. 13. Siemens Industry, Inc.; Fire Safety Division. 14. Silent Knight. 15. SimplexGrinnell LP. 16. System Sensor. 17. Stanley CSS.

B. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.

1. Single-action mechanism, pull-lever type; with integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch. 3. Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated, clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top to

permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates an integral battery-powered audible horn intended to discourage false-alarm operation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for ventilation, temperature, humidity, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that manufacturer's written instructions for environmental conditions have been permanently established in spaces where equipment and wiring are installed, before installation begins.



















B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations of connections before installation.


3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 72, NFPA 101, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for installation and testing of fire-alarm equipment. Install all electrical wiring to comply with requirements in NFPA 70 including, but not limited to, Article 760, "Fire Alarm Systems."

1. Devices placed in service before all other trades have completed cleanup shall be replaced.

2. Devices installed but not yet placed in service shall be protected from construction dust, debris, dirt, moisture, and damage according to manufacturer's written storage instructions.

B. Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 78 inches above the finished floor.

1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing:

1. Comply with the "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" section in the "Initiating Devices" chapter in NFPA 72, for smoke-detector spacing.

2. Comply with the "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" section in the "Initiating Devices" chapter in NFPA 72, for heat-detector spacing.

3. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet. 4. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 36 inches from air-supply diffuser or return-air

opening. 5. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches from any part of a lighting

fixture and not directly above pendant mounted or indirect lighting.

D. Install a cover on each smoke detector that is not placed in service during construction. Cover shall remain in place except during system testing. Remove cover prior to system turnover.

E. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of duct. Tubes more than 36 inches (9100 mm) long shall be supported at both ends.

1. Do not install smoke detector in duct smoke-detector housing during construction. Install detector only during system testing and prior to system turnover.

F. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling. Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated.



G. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least 6 inches below the ceiling. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated.

H. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

I. Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes:

1. Install manual fire-alarm box in the normal path of egress within 60 inches of the exit doorway.

2. Mount manual fire-alarm box on a background of a contrasting color. 3. The operable part of manual fire-alarm box shall be between 42 inches and 48 inches

above floor level. All devices shall be mounted at the same height unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 PATHWAYS

A. Pathways above recessed ceilings and in nonaccessible locations may be routed exposed.

1. Exposed pathways located less than 96 inches above the floor shall be installed in EMT.

B. Pathways shall be EMT per JCH-814 requirements.

C. Exposed EMT shall be painted red enamel.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and systems. Install the interface device less than 36 inches from the device controlled. Make an addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system being controlled.

1. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated HVAC duct systems. 2. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies. 3. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches. 4. Data communication circuits for connection to building management system.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.

3.6 GROUNDING

A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit.



B. Ground shielded cables at the control panel location only. Insulate shield at device location.


A. Field tests shall be witnessed by Construction Manager.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.

D. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.

a. Inspection shall be based on completed record Drawings and system documentation that is required by the "Completion Documents, Preparation" table in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.

b. Comply with the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the "Inspection" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.

2. System Testing: Comply with the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4.

4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions.

5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions.

6. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

E. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances.

F. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's designated service organization. Include preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective



components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.

1. Include visual inspections according to the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the "Testing" paragraph of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Perform tests in the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" paragraph of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

3. Perform tests per the "Testing Frequencies" table in the "Testing" paragraph of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

3.9 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT

A. Comply with UL 864.

B. Technical Support: Beginning at Substantial Completion, service agreement shall include software support for two years.

C. Upgrade Service: At Substantial Completion, update software to latest version. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system and new or revised licenses for using software.

1. Upgrade Notice: At least 30 days to allow Owner to schedule access to system and to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.

3.10 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system.




SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Protecting existing vegetation to remain. 2. Removing existing vegetation. 3. Clearing and grubbing. 4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 5. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements. 6. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and abandoning site utilities in place. 7. Temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures.


1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary utility services, construction and support facilities, security and protection facilities, and temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures].

2. Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal] and Section 018113.13 "Sustainable Design Requirements - LEED for New Construction and Major Renovations" Section 024116 "Structure Demolition" for demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms.

B. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.

C. Topsoil: Top layer of the soil profile consisting of existing native surface topsoil or existing in-place surface soil and is the zone where plant roots grow.

D. Plant-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees, groups of trees, shrubs, or other vegetation to be protected during construction, and indicated on Drawings.

SITE CLEARING 311000 - 1


E. Tree-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction, and indicated on Drawings.

F. Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants.

1.4 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP

A. Except for stripped topsoil and other materials indicated to be stockpiled or otherwise remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.


A. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing.

1. Use sufficiently detailed photographs or videotape.

B. Record Drawings: Identifying and accurately showing locations of capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site job trailer.


A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by the Owner.

B. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises as directed by the Owner.

C. Utility Locator Service: Notify Underground Service Alert (USA) at least 48 hours prior to any construction activity.

D. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures are in place.

E. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:



1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2. Parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Impoundment of water. 4. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated.

F. Soil Stripping, Handling, and Stockpiling: Perform only when the topsoil is dry or slightly moist.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

1. Obtain approved borrow soil material off-site when satisfactory soil material is not available on-site.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.

B. Locate and clearly identify trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain or to be relocated. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.

1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.

3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

A. Provide temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings and requirements of Washoe County Dust Control Permit.

B. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones.

C. Inspect, maintain, and repair erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent storm water control measures are in place and functioning.



D. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.

3.3 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION

A. General: Protect trees and plants remaining on-site.

B. Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by the Owner.

3.4 EXISTING UTILITIES

A. Contractor shall coordinate with building and utility owners to arrange for disconnecting and sealing indicated utilities that serve existing structures before site clearing.

1. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before proceeding with site clearing.

B. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap utilities indicated to be removed or abandoned in place.

1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities.

C. Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner’s written permission.

D. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.

E. Removal of underground utilities is included in earthwork sections and with applicable fire suppression, plumbing, HVAC, electrical, communications, electronic safety and security and utilities sections and Section 024116 "Structure Demolition".

3.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction.

1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated.

B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.



1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches, and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.

3.6 TOPSOIL STRIPPING

A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.

B. Strip topsoil to depth of 6 inches in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials. The natural ground surface shall be cleared of all organic growth, such as sod, trees, logs, upturned stumps, roots of downed trees, brush, grass, weeds, and all other objectionable materials within the limits of construction.

1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter; trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials.

C. Stockpile topsoil away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust and erosion by water.

1. Do not stockpile topsoil within protection zones. 2. Dispose of surplus topsoil. Surplus topsoil is that which exceeds quantity

indicated to be stockpiled or reused. 3. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading.

3.7 SITE IMPROVEMENTS

A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and necessary to facilitate new construction.

B. Remove footings, slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated.

1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut along line of existing pavement to remain before removing adjacent existing pavement. Saw-cut faces vertically.

3.8 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

B. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities. Do not interfere with other Project work.



SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. "Geotechnical Investigation for Proposed Sierra Nevada Jobs Corps Center New Cafeteria Building and Demolition of Existing Cafeteria Building" Prepared by Pezonella Associates, Inc. dated October 12, 2012.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements. 2. Drainage course for concrete slabs-on-grade. 3. Subbase course for concrete walks and pavements. 4. Subbase course and base course for asphalt paving. 5. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. 6. Excavating and backfilling trenches for utilities and pits for buried utility

structures.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary controls,

utilities, and support facilities; also for temporary site fencing if not in another Section.

2. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for granular course if placed over vapor retarder and beneath the slab-on-grade.

3. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling topsoil, and removal of above- and below-grade improvements and utilities.

4. Section 329300 "Plants" for finish grading in planting areas and tree and shrub pit excavation and planting.

1.3 UNIT PRICES

A. This is a lump sum contract.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.

EARTH MOVING 312000 - 1


1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe.

2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Base Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.

C. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.

D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

E. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water.

F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated.

1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Owner. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.

2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Owner. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Owner, shall be without additional compensation.

G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

H. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock material 3/4 cu. yd. or more in volume that exceed a standard penetration resistance of 100 blows/2 inches when tested by a geotechnical testing agency, according to ASTM D 1586.

I. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.

J. Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.

K. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.

L. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings.




A. Product Data: For each type of the following manufactured products required:

1. Geotextiles. 2. Controlled low-strength material, including design mixture. 3. Warning tapes.

B. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in sizes indicated below:

1. Geotextile: 12 by 12 inches.



B. Material Test Reports: For each on-site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill as follows:

1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 1557.

C. Preexcavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by earth moving operations. Submit before earth moving begins.


A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 and ASTM D 3740 for testing indicated.

B. Pre-excavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site job trailer.


A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during earth moving operations.



B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing earth moving indicated on property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract.

1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by Owner.



C. Utility Locator Service: Notify Underground Service Alert (USA) for area where Project is located before beginning earth moving operations.

D. Do not commence earth moving operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures, specified on the plans are in place.

E. Do not commence earth moving operations until plant-protection measures are in place.

F. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:

1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2. Parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Impoundment of water. 4. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations.

B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to ASTM D 2487, Groups A-1, A-2-4, A-2-5, and A-3 according to AASHTO M 145, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

1. Liquid Limit: 35 Max. 2. Plasticity Index: 12 Max.

C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D 2487, Groups A-2-6, A-2-7, A-4, A-5, A-6, and A-7 according to AASHTO M 145, or a combination of these groups unless approved by on-site geotechnical engineer and Owner.

1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.

D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 100 percent passing a 1 inch sieve and not more than 10 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.



F. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and not more than 10 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

G. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and 0 to 8 percent passing a No. sieve.

H. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve.

I. Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate.

J. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.

2.2 GEOTEXTILES

A. Subsurface Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced:

1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288. 2. Grab Tensile Strength: 157 lbf ; ASTM D 4632. 3. Sewn Seam Strength: 142 lbf ; ASTM D 4632. 4. Tear Strength: 56 lbf ; ASTM D 4533. 5. Puncture Strength: 56 lbf ; ASTM D 4833. 6. Apparent Opening Size: No. 40 sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751. 7. Permittivity: 0.5 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491. 8. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355.

B. Separation Geotextile: Woven geotextile fabric, manufactured for separation applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation less than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced:

1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288. 2. Grab Tensile Strength: 247 lbf ; ASTM D 4632. 3. Sewn Seam Strength: 222 lbf ; ASTM D 4632. 4. Tear Strength: 90 lbf ; ASTM D 4533. 5. Puncture Strength: 90 lbf ; ASTM D 4833. 6. Apparent Opening Size: No. 60 sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751. 7. Permittivity: 0.02 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491. 8. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355.

2.3 CONTROLLED LOW-STRENGTH MATERIAL



A. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Self-compacting, flowable concrete material produced from the following:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. 3. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate

size. 4. Foaming Agent: ASTM C 869. 5. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M. 6. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

B. Produce low-density, controlled low-strength material with the following physical properties:

1. As-Cast Unit Weight: 30 to 36 lb/cu. ft. at point of placement, when tested according to ASTM C 138/C 138M.

2. Compressive Strength: 80 psi when tested according to ASTM C 495.

C. Produce conventional-weight, controlled low-strength material with 80-psi compressive strength when tested according to ASTM C 495.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility; colored as follows:

1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems.

B. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored as follows:

1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION



A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth moving operations.

B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth moving operations.

C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove temporary protection before placing subsequent materials.

3.2 DEWATERING

A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.

B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation.

1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.

3.3 EXPLOSIVES

A. Explosives: Use of explosives is not allowed.

3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL

A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for removal of obstructions.

1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials replace with satisfactory soil materials.

3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.



1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.

2. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility

Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearing surfaces.

B. Excavations at Edges of Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones:

1. Excavate by hand to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.

2. Cut and protect roots according to requirements in Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."

3.6 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS

A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades.

3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line.

B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit unless otherwise indicated.

1. Clearance: 12 inches each side of pipe or conduit.

C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade.

1. For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches in nominal diameter, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade.

2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe or conduit circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill.

3. For flat-bottomed, multiple-duct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support conduit on an undisturbed subgrade.



4. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.

D. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 4 inches deeper than bottom of pipe and conduit elevations to allow for bedding course. Hand-excavate deeper for bells of pipe.

1. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.

E. Trenches in Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones:

1. Hand-excavate to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.

2. Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with installation of utilities.

3. Cut and protect roots according to requirements in Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."

3.8 SUBGRADE INSPECTION

A. Notify Owner when excavations have reached required subgrade.

B. If Owner determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.

C. Proof-roll subgrade pavements with a pneumatic-tired per geotechnical engineers recommendations to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.

1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph. 2. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or

rutting, as determined by Owner, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.

D. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.

E. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Owner, without additional compensation.

3.9 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi may be used when approved by Owner.



1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as directed by Owner.

3.10 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

3.11 BACKFILL

A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:

1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.

2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. 3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported

walls.

B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.12 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.

C. Trenches under Footings: Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches of bottom of footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete is specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete"

D. Trenches under Roadways: Provide 4-inch- thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 inches below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase course. Concrete is specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete"

E. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while removing shoring and bracing.



F. Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material free of particles larger than 3/8" in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the pipe or conduit.

1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

G. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Place initial backfill of controlled low-strength material to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the pipe or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

H. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.

I. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Place final backfill of controlled low-strength material to final subgrade elevation.

J. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade, except 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

3.13 SOIL FILL

A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material.

B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:

1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill. 4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. 5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.

C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.14 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.

1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.

2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.

3.15 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS



A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure.

C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557:

1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.

2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent.

3. Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent.

4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 90 percent.

3.16 GRADING

A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.

1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required

surface tolerances.

B. Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:

1. Turf or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch. 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch. 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.

C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 12-foot straightedge.

3.17 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE

A. Subdrainage Pipe: Specified in Section 334600 "Subdrainage."

B. Subsurface Drain: Place subsurface drainage geotextile around perimeter of subdrainage trench. Place a 6-inch course of filter material on subsurface drainage geotextile to support subdrainage pipe. Encase subdrainage pipe in a minimum of 12 inches of filter material, placed in compacted layers 6 inches thick, and wrap in subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches.



1. Compact each filter material layer to 85 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698 with a minimum of two passes of a plate-type vibratory compactor.

C. Drainage Backfill: Place and compact filter material over subsurface drain, in width indicated, to within 12 inches of final subgrade, in compacted layers 6 inches thick. Overlay drainage backfill with one layer of subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches.

1. Compact each filter material layer to 85 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698 with a minimum of two passes of a plate-type vibratory compactor.

2. Place and compact impervious fill over drainage backfill in 6-inch thick compacted layers to final subgrade.

3.18 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES UNDER PAVEMENTS AND WALKS

A. Place subbase course and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase course and base course under pavements and walks as follows:

1. Install separation geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends.

2. Place base course material over subbase course under hot-mix asphalt pavement.

3. Shape subbase course and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades.

4. Place subbase course and base course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer.

5. Place subbase course and base course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick.

6. Compact subbase course and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557.

C. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase course and base course to prevent lateral movement. Construct shoulders, at least 12 inches wide, of satisfactory soil materials and compact simultaneously with each subbase and base layer to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557.

3.19 DRAINAGE COURSE UNDER CONCRETE SLABS-ON-GRADE

A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs-on-grade as follows:



1. Install subdrainage geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends.

2. Place drainage course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer. 3. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of

equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick.

4. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.


A. Special Inspections: Contractor shall engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:

1. Determine prior to placement of fill that site has been prepared in compliance with requirements.

2. Determine that fill material and maximum lift thickness comply with requirements. 3. Determine, at the required frequency, that in-place density of compacted fill

complies with requirements.

B. Testing Agency: Contractor shall engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.

D. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Owner.

E. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies:

1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least one test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests.

2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least one test for every 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests.

3. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for every 150 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than two tests.

F. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.



3.21 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.

B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.

1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Owner; reshape and recompact.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.




SECTION 312005 - TRENCHING

PART 1 - General



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Excavating and backfilling trenches for utilities and pits for buried utility structures.


1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary controls, utilities, and support facilities; also for temporary site fencing if not in another Section.

2. Division 21, 22, 23, 26, 27, 28, and 33 Sections as applicable for installing underground mechanical and electrical utilities and buried mechanical and electrical structures.

3. Division 31 Section "Earthwork" for soil types and earth moving.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Utility: Any buried or above ground piping, conduit, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Detectable Warning Tapes.


A. Existing Utilities: A diligent attempt has been made to indicate on the Drawings the locations of utilities which may affect the Work. Utility locations are based on information provided by the Owner and limited above grade site observation. The locations of indicated utilities shall be considered approximate only until exposed by the Contractor.

TRENCHING 312005 - 1


1. Maintain existing utilities in constant service during construction of the Work. 2. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is

located before beginning trenching operations.

B. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during trenching operations.



C. Do not commence trenching operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures are in place.

D. Do not commence earth moving operations until plant and landscape protection measures are in place.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. The acceptance of borrowed soil materials shall be subject to review and approval by the architect.

B. Satisfactory Soils:

1. Soil Type S1: Excavated and re-used material, graded, free of lumps larger than 3 inches, rocks larger than 2 inches, and debris.

2. Soil Type S2: Excavated and reused material, graded, free of roots, lumps greater than one inch, rocks larger than ½ inch, debris, weeds and foreign matter.

3. Soil Type S3: Imported topsoil, friable loam; reasonably free of roots, rocks larger than ½ inch, debris, weeds, and foreign matter.

4. Soil Type S4: Imported borrow, suitable for purposes intended, free of any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter., with minimum R value of 50.

C. Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility.

1. Detectable Warning Tape: Provided detectable warning tape for underground utilities that would otherwise not be detectable by above ground utility locating



methods. Detectable warning tape shall include metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection and be detectable by a metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep.

2. Colors: Warning tape shall be colored as follows:

a. Red: Electric. b. Yellow: Gas. c. Orange: Telephone and other communications. d. Blue: Water systems. e. Green: Sewer systems.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by trenching operations.

B. Locate, identify, and mark existing underground utilities.

C. Protect plant life, lawns, trees, shrubs, and other features not authorized for removal.

D. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during trenching operations.

E. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove temporary protection before placing subsequent materials.

F. Comply with all provisions of the Construction Safety Orders and General Safety Orders of the California Division of Industrial Safety, as well as all other applicable regulations as they pertain to the protection of workers from the hazard of caving ground in excavations.

G. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. Protect excavations from softening and damage by rain or water accumulation.

1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.

3.2 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Provide protection for all open excavations, backfill trenches on same day in which excavation occurs to avoid leaving excavations open overnight.

B. Excavate trenches to lines, depths, and widths required for installation of utilities.



C. Cut trenches just wide enough to enable installation of utilities and proper backfill, and to allow inspection.

D. Employ equipment and methods appropriate to the work site. Small mechanical excavators may be used only in areas where there is sufficient space so as not to damage adjacent improvements, and where the locations of all existing utilities have been determined.

E. Use hand excavation methods to locate and expose existing utilities along the route of the new work prior to using any mechanical equipment. If mechanical equipment is allowed at a particular location, it may only be used after the completion by the Contractor of a successful exhaustive search by hand methods to locate all existing facilities as indicated on the plans, and as indicated on the ground by utility locating service or Owner.

F. When excavating through tree roots, perform work by hand and cut roots, where authorized, with a saw.

G. Excavate trenches to provide not less than the minimum cover required.

H. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations.

I. Hand trim excavations for bell and spigot pipe joints. Remove loose matter.

J. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.

K. Excavate trenches, pits or holes bottoming in hardpan to a minimum of 6 inches below the grade for the bottom of the pipe and any couplings, and then backfill to the pipe grade with satisfactory soil material, thoroughly compacted. No additional payment will be made for such over-excavation and refill.

L. In trenches where a firm foundation is not encountered, such as soft, spongy, or otherwise unsuitable material, remove the material to a minimum of 12 inches below the bottom of the proposed pipe or structure, or to a depth determined by the Engineer, and backfill the space with satisfactory soil material containing sufficient moisture to produce maximum compaction. No additional payment will be made for such additional excavation or backfill.

M. Stockpile excavated material to be returned to trench adjacent to trench in location which will not be detrimental to existing improvements, trees, or pedestrian or vehicular traffic. Cover to prevent windblown dust. Remove unsuitable or excess material not being used, from site.

3.3 BACKFILL FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Prior to placing backfill in excavations, complete the following:

1. Survey locations of underground utilities for Record Documents.



2. Test and inspect underground utilities. 3. Remove trash and debris. 4. Remove temporary shoring and bracing.

B. Backfilling and Compaction: Carefully place and compact backfill of satisfactory soil materials as follows:

1. Initial Backfill: Place initial backfill of satisfactory soil free of particles larger than 1 inch in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches over the pipe or conduit. Carefully compact initial backfill evenly on both sides and along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit.

2. Subsequent Backfill: Place backfill of satisfactory soil material in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth and carefully compact.

3. Final Backfill: Place final backfill in thickness required, but not more than 8 inches, to achieve final subgrade elevation after compaction and as required for grading.

4. Compaction: Compact soil using hand operated tampers or lightweight power operated tamping equipment that will not damage or displace installed utilities. Compact each layer of backfill to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557:

a. Turf or Unpaved Areas: 85%. b. Areas Under Paving: 95% for the top 24 inches below the subgrade

elevation, 85% for depths over 24 inches below the subgrade elevation.

C. Trenches under Roadways: Provide 4-inch thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 inches below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase course. Concrete is specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

D. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

E. Soil Moisture Control: Uniformly moisten or aerate soil materials before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.

1. Do not over moisten or flood trenches to move or settle soil materials. 2. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or

contain frost or ice. 3. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material

that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.

F. Grading: Uniformly grade areas to be smooth and flush with adjacent grade free of irregular or abrupt surface changes. Provide final grading in turf or landscaped areas where no further grading will occur.




A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent Work only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.

C. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1557. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies:

1. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for every 150 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than two tests.

D. When testing agency reports that backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 321216 - ASPHALT PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings, and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Asphalt surface treatments.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for subgrade preparation, fill material, unbound-

aggregate subbase and base courses, and aggregate pavement shoulders. 2. Section 321373 "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants" for joint sealants and fillers at

pavement terminations.

1.3 UNIT PRICES

A. Work of this Section is affected by general provisions of contract.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at SNJCC job trailer.

1. Review methods and procedures related to hot-mix asphalt paving including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Review proposed sources of paving materials, including capabilities and location of plant that will manufacture hot-mix asphalt.

b. Review requirements for protecting paving work, including restriction of traffic during installation period and for remainder of construction period.



1. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties. 2. Job-Mix Designs: Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of

each job mix proposed for the Work.

ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 1


3. Job-Mix Designs: For each job mix proposed for the Work.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content.


A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

B. Material Test Reports: For each paving material, by a qualified testing agency.



A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Mix designs shall be performed in a laboratory accredited by AASHTO or other ASTM recognized accrediting organization in the applicable test methods and stamped and signed by a registered Professional Engineer licensed by the State of Nevada.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM D 3666 for testing indicated.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is frozen, wet, or if rain is imminent or expected before time required for adequate cure, or if the following conditions are not met:

1. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F and rising at

time of placement.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AGGREGATES

A. General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous installations. Materials shall meet the requirements of the locally adopted Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction “Orange Book”.

B. Coarse Aggregate: Type 2 with lime, conforming to the applicable requirement of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction “Orange Book” and



ASTM D 692/D 692M, sound; angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or cured, crushed blast-furnace slag.

2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS

A. Asphalt Binder: AASHTO M 320, PG 64-22.

B. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D 3381/D 3381M for viscosity-graded material.

C. Emulsified Asphalt Prime Coat: ASTM D 2027, medium-curing cutback asphalt, MC-70 or MC-250, and conforming to the Standard Specifications for Public Works Constructions “Orange Book”.

D. Tack Coat: Asphalt emulsion, Type SS-1h, conforming to the requirements of the standard Specifications for Public Works Construction “Orange Book” and, ASTM D 977 or AASHTO M 140 emulsified asphalt.

E. Water: Potable.

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Paving Geotextile: AASHTO M 288 paving fabric; nonwoven polypropylene; resistant to chemical attack, rot, and mildew; and specifically designed for paving applications.

B. Joint Sealant: ASTM D 6690 or AASHTO M 324, Type I Type II or III, hot-applied, single-component, polymer-modified bituminous sealant.

2.4 MIXES

A. Recycled Content of Hot-Mix Asphalt: consist of a mixture of recycled asphalt product content not less than 10 percent or more than 15 percent by weight conforming to the requirements of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction “Orange Book”.

1. Surface Course Limit: Recycled content no more than 15 percent by weight.

B. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Type 2 with lime, PG 64-22, 50 blow -4% Voids shall be used for all asphalt paving. Bituminous Plantmix designs shall be performed in a laboratory accredited by AASHTO, and stamped and signed by a registered Professional Engineer Licensed by the State of Nevada. The mix design for bituminous plantmix shall be in accordance with the Asphalt Institute Manual Series No. 2 (Mix Design Methods for Asphalt and Other Mix Types, MS-20), utilizing the Marshall Method. Mix designs shall meet the requirement of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction “Orange Book” and complying with the following requirements:

1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where Project is located.



2. Base Course: Type 2 Class B aggregate base course per the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction “Orange Book”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to begin paving.

B. Proof-roll subgrade below pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.

1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in accordance with the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction “Orange Book”.

2. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Owner, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.

C. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PATCHING

A. Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section to sound base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches (300 mm) into perimeter of adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. Remove excavated material. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form new subgrade.

B. Tack Coat: Before placing patch material, apply tack coat uniformly to vertical asphalt surfaces abutting the patch.

1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.

Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.

C. Placing Patch Material: Fill excavated pavement areas with hot-mix asphalt base mix for full thickness of patch and, while still hot, compact flush with adjacent surface.

D. Placing Patch Material: Partially fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix and, while still hot, compact. Cover asphalt base course with compacted, hot-mix surface layer finished flush with adjacent surfaces.

3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive



paving. Subgrade preparation shall meet the requirements of the Standard Specification for Public Works Construction “Orange Book”.

B. Emulsified Asphalt Prime Coat: Apply uniformly over surface of compacted unbound-aggregate base course at a rate of 0.15 to 0.25 gal./sq. yd per the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction “Orange Book”. Apply enough material to penetrate and seal, but not flood, surface. Allow prime coat to cure.

1. If prime coat is not entirely absorbed within 24 hours after application, spread sand over surface to blot excess asphalt. Use enough sand to prevent pickup under traffic. Remove loose sand by sweeping before pavement is placed and after volatiles have evaporated.

2. Protect primed substrate from damage until ready to receive paving.

C. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.08 to 0.13 gal./sq. yd per the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction “Orange Book”.

1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.

Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.

3.4 PAVING GEOTEXTILE INSTALLATION

A. Place paving geotextile promptly according to manufacturer's written instructions. Broom or roll geotextile smooth and free of wrinkles and folds. Overlap longitudinal joints 4 inches and transverse joints 6 inches.

B. Protect paving geotextile from traffic and other damage, and place hot-mix asphalt overlay the same day.

3.5 PLACING HOT-MIX ASPHALT

A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place asphalt mix by hand in areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted.

1. Place hot-mix asphalt base course in number of lifts and thicknesses indicated. 2. Place hot-mix asphalt in 2” maximum lifts. 3. Spread mix at a minimum temperature of 250 deg F. 4. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high

side of one-way slopes unless otherwise indicated. 5. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls

and tears in asphalt-paving mat.

B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet wide unless infill edge strips of a lesser width are required.



1. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips. Overlap mix placement about 1 to 1-1/2 inches from strip to strip to ensure proper compaction of mix along longitudinal joints.

2. Complete a section of asphalt base course before placing asphalt surface course.

C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.

3.6 JOINTS

A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints free of depressions, with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix asphalt course.

1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints. 2. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches. 3. Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 24 inches. 4. Construct transverse joints at each point where paver ends a day's work and

resumes work at a subsequent time. Construct these joints using either "bulkhead" or "papered" method according to AI MS-22, for both "Ending a Lane" and "Resumption of Paving Operations." as shown on Drawings.

5. Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive displacement.

6. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course density.

3.7 COMPACTION

A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or with vibratory-plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.

1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F.

B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements.

C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density:

1. Average Density: 96 percent of the density obtained with the Marshall Apparatus as per ASTM D1559. Testing for density shall be per the requirements of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction “Orange Book”.



2. Average Density: 92 percent, using the Theoretical Maximum Rice Specific Gravity in determination of relative compaction in accordance with the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction “Orange Book”.

D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still warm.

E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly.

F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials and replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface smoothness.

G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened.

H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked.

3.8 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Pavement Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following tolerances:

1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm). 2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus.

B. Pavement Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a 12-foot straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas:

1. Base Course: 1/4 inch. 2. Surface Course: 1/8 inch.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections per the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction “Orange Book”.

B. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determined according to ASTM D 3549 and the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction “Orange Book”.

C. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested for compliance with smoothness tolerances.

D. In-Place Density: Testing agency will take samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and compacted pavement according to ASTM D 979.



1. Reference maximum theoretical density will be determined by averaging results from four samples of hot-mix asphalt-paving mixture delivered daily to site, prepared according to ASTM D 2041, and compacted according to job-mix specifications.

2. In-place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core samples according to ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.

a. One core sample will be taken for every 1000 sq. yd. or less of installed pavement, with no fewer than three cores taken.

b. Field density of in-place compacted pavement may also be determined by nuclear method according to ASTM D 2950 and correlated with ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.

E. Replace and compact hot-mix asphalt where core tests were taken.

F. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.




SECTION 321313 - CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Driveways. 2. Curbs and gutters. 3. Walks. 4. Post Foundations 5. Miscellaneous Site Concrete Post Footings


1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for general building applications of concrete.

2. Section 321373 "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants" for joint sealants in expansion and contraction joints within concrete paving and in joints between concrete paving and asphalt paving or adjacent construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, and ground granulated blast-furnace slag.



B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content.

2. Design Mixtures for Credit ID 1: For each concrete mixture containing fly ash as a replacement for portland cement or other portland cement replacements. For

CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 1


each design mixture submitted, include an equivalent concrete mixture that does not contain portland cement replacements, to determine amount of portland cement replaced.

C. Other Action Submittals:

1. Design Mixtures: For each concrete paving mixture. Include alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.



B. Material Certificates: For the following, from manufacturer:

1. Cementitious materials. 2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 3. Fiber reinforcement. 4. Admixtures. 5. Curing compounds. 6. Applied finish materials. 7. Bonding agent or epoxy adhesive. 8. Joint fillers.

C. Material Test Reports: For each of the following:

1. Aggregates.



A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

B. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

C. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 unless otherwise indicated.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site job trailer.

1. Review methods and procedures related to concrete paving, including but not limited to, the following:

a. Concrete mixture design. b. Quality control of concrete materials and concrete paving construction

practices.



2. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with concrete paving to attend, including the following:

a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Concrete paving subcontractor.


A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORMS

A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, and smooth exposed surfaces.

1. Use flexible or uniformly curved forms for curves with a radius of 100 feet or less.

B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and that will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60; deformed.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and source throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, gray portland cement Type II Supplement with the following:

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M.



D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

E. Chemical Admixtures: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,

Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

2.4 FIBER REINFORCEMENT

A. Synthetic Fiber: Polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete paving, complying with ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, Type III.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Monofilament Fibers:

1) Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; FIBRASOL II P. 2) Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Fiberstrand 100,

Fiberstrand 150. 3) FORTA Corporation; [FORTA ECONO-MONO] [or] [FORTA Mighty-

Mono]. 4) Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn.; Grace MicroFiber. 5) Metalcrete Industries; Polystrand 1000. 6) QC Construction Products; QC FIBERS. 7) <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.

b. Fibrillated Fibers:

1) Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; FIBRASOL F. 2) Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Fiberstrand F. 3) FORTA Corporation; [FORTA Econo-Net] [or] [FORTA Super-Net]. 4) Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn.; Grace Fibers. 5) Propex Concrete Systems Corp.; Fibermesh 300. 6) <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.

2.5 CURING MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: Shall conform to ACI 308.



B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

D. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular, film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.


a. Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; Caltexol CIMFILM. b. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC; Confilm. c. ChemMasters; Spray-Film. d. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Aquafilm. e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film (J-74). f. Edoco by Dayton Superior; BurkeFilm. g. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Eucobar. h. Kaufman Products, Inc.; VaporAid. i. Lambert Corporation; LAMBCO Skin. j. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-CON. k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; EVAPRE. l. Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold. m. Nox-Crete Products Group; MONOFILM. n. Sika Corporation, Inc.; SikaFilm. o. SpecChem, LLC; Spec Film. p. Symons by Dayton Superior; Finishing Aid. q. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2120 TRI-FILM. r. Unitex; PRO-FILM. s. Vexcon Chemicals Inc.; Certi-Vex EnvioAssist.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating.


a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; A-H Curing Compound #2 DR WB. b. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure Clear. c. Conspec by Dayton Superior; [D.O.T. Resin Cure] [DSSCC Clear Resin

Cure]. d. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Rez Cure (J-11-W). e. Edoco by Dayton Superior; [DSSCC Clear Resin Cure] [Resin Emulsion

Cure V.O.C. (Type I)]. f. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Kurez W VOX. g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 420. h. Lambert Corporation; AQUA KURE - CLEAR. i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M CURE R. j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100-CLEAR SERIES.



k. Nox-Crete Products Group; Resin Cure E. l. SpecChem, LLC; PaveCure Rez. m. Symons by Dayton Superior; Resi-Chem Clear. n. Tamms Industries, Inc., Euclid Chemical Company (The); TAMMSCURE

WB 30C. o. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; [TK-2519 WB] [TK-

2519 DC WB]. p. Vexcon Chemicals Inc.; Certi-Vex Enviocure 100.

F. White, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 2, Class B, dissipating.


a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; A-H Curing Compound #2 WP WB. b. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure 2000. c. Conspec by Dayton Superior; [D.O.T. Resin Cure White] [DSSCC White

Resin Cure]. d. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem White Pigmented Cure (J-10-W). e. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Resin Emulsion Cure V.O.C. (Type II). f. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Kurez VOX White

Pigmented. g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 450. h. Lambert Corporation; AQUA KURE - WHITE. i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M CURE R-2. j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100-WHITE SERIES. k. SpecChem, LLC; PaveCure Rez White. l. Symons by Dayton Superior; Resi-Chem White. m. Vexcon Chemicals Inc.; Certi-Vex Enviocure White 100. n. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.

2.6 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Joint Fillers: ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork in preformed strips.

B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.

C. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881/C 881M, two-component epoxy resin capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces; of class suitable for application temperature, of grade complying with requirements, and of the following types:

1. Types I and II, non-load bearing Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.

D. Chemical Surface Retarder: Water-soluble, liquid, set retarder with color dye, for horizontal concrete surface application, capable of temporarily delaying final hardening of concrete to a depth of 1/8 to 1/4 inch.



1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

a. ChemMasters; Exposee. b. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Delay S. c. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Etch (J-73). d. Edoco by Dayton Superior; True Etch Surface Retarder. e. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Surface Retarder

Formula S. f. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Expose. g. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; TOP-STOP. h. Metalcrete Industries; Surftard. i. Nox-Crete Products Group; CRETE-NOX TA. j. Scofield, L. M. Company; LITHOTEX Top Surface Retarder. k. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Rugasol-S. l. SpecChem, LLC; Spec Etch. m. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-6000 Concrete Surface

Retarder. n. Unitex; TOP-ETCH Surface Retarder. o. Vexcon Chemicals Inc.; Certi-Vex Envioset. p. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.

2.7 DETECTABLE WARNING MATERIALS

A. Detectable Warning Stamp: Semirigid polyurethane mats with formed underside capable of imprinting detectable warning pattern on plastic concrete; perforated with a vent hole at each dome.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Advanced Surfaces Inc. b. Matcrete Precision Stamped Concrete Tools. c. Southern Color N.A., Inc. d. Stampcrete International Ltd. e. Superior Decorative by Dayton Superior.

2. Size of Stamp: One piece [matching detectable warning area shown on Drawings] [24 by 24 inches

B. Liquid Release Agent: Manufacturer's standard, clear, evaporating formulation designed to facilitate release of stamp mats.


a. Advanced Surfaces Inc.; Liquid Release.



b. Matcrete Precision Stamped Concrete Tools; Liquid Release Agent. c. Southern Color N.A., Inc.; SCC Clear Liquid Release. d. Stampcrete International Ltd.; Stampcrete Liquid Release. e. Superior Decorative by Dayton Superior; Pro Liquid Release.

2.8 WHEEL STOPS

A. Wheel Stops: Precast, air-entrained concrete, 2500-psi (17.2-MPa) minimum compressive strength, 4-1/2 inches high by 9 inches wide by 72 inches long. Provide chamfered corners and drainage slots on underside and holes for anchoring to substrate.

1. Dowels: Galvanized steel, 3/4 inch in diameter, 10-inch minimum length.

2.9 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete, and as determined by either laboratory trial mixtures or field experience.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete design mixtures for the trial batch method.

2. When automatic machine placement is used, determine design mixtures and obtain laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements.

B. Proportion mixtures to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.45. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).

C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal-weight concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows: 1. Air Content: 6 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent for 1-inch nominal maximum

aggregate size.

D. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing admixture in concrete as required for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

E. Cementitious Materials:[ Use fly ash, to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used., by not less than 40 percent.][ Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:]

1. Fly Ash: 25 percent.



F. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 1.5 lb/cu. yd.

2.10 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F , reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances.

B. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete paving to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding.

1. Completely proof-roll subbase in one direction[ and repeat in perpendicular direction]. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h).

2. Proof-roll with a pneumatic-tired and loaded, 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons (13.6 tonnes).

3. Correct subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1/2 inch according to requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.

3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION

A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage.



3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.

C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.

D. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or replace units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2-inch overlap of adjacent mats.

3.5 JOINTS

A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edges true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline unless otherwise indicated.

1. When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints unless otherwise indicated.

B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless paving terminates at isolation joints.

1. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of paving strips unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide tie bars at sides of paving strips where indicated. 3. Butt Joints: Use [bonding agent] [epoxy bonding adhesive] at joint locations

where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

4. Keyed Joints: Provide preformed keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with keys unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete.

5. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or coat with asphalt one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, other fixed objects, and where indicated.

1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 30 feet unless otherwise indicated. 2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 3. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished

surface if joint sealant is indicated.



4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated.

5. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint-filler sections together.

6. During concrete placement, protect top edge of joint filler with metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint.

D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows[, to match jointing of existing adjacent concrete paving]:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with grooving tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes.

a. Tolerance: Ensure that grooved joints are within 3 inches either way from centers of dowels.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developing random contraction cracks.

a. Tolerance: Ensure that sawed joints are within 3 inches either way from centers of dowels.

3. Doweled Contraction Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or coat with asphalt one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

E. Edging: After initial floating, tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete with an edging tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes

3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation[, steel reinforcement,] and items to be embedded or cast-in.

B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface[ and steel reinforcement] before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.

C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment.

D. Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.



E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing.

F. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.

G. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M) by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping.

1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies[, reinforcement,] or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement and joint devices.

H. Screed paving surface with a straightedge and strike off.

I. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open-textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.

J. Curbs and Gutters: Use design mixture for automatic machine placement. Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing.

K. Slip-Form Paving: Use design mixture for automatic machine placement. Produce paving to required thickness, lines, grades, finish, and jointing.

1. Compact subbase and prepare subgrade of sufficient width to prevent displacement of slip-form paving machine during operations.

L. Cold-Weather Placement: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing, or low temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 and the following:

1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents

or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in design mixtures.

M. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) and as follows when hot-weather conditions exist:

1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated in total



amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3. Fog-spray forms[, steel reinforcement,] and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.7 FLOAT FINISHING

A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.

B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture. 1. Medium-to-Coarse-Textured Broom Finish: Provide a coarse finish by striating

float-finished concrete surface 1/16 to 1/8 inch (1.6 to 3 mm) deep with a stiff-bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic.

3.8 DETECTABLE WARNINGS

A. Blockouts: Form blockouts in concrete for installation of detectable paving units.

1. Tolerance for Opening Size: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.

B. Stamped Detectable Warnings: Install stamped detectable warnings as part of a continuous concrete paving placement and according to stamp-mat manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Before using stamp mats, verify that the vent holes are unobstructed. 2. Apply liquid release agent to the concrete surface and the stamp mat. 3. Stamping: [While initially finished concrete is plastic] [After application and final

floating of pigmented mineral dry-shake hardener], accurately align and place stamp mats in sequence. Uniformly load, gently vibrate, and press mats into concrete to produce imprint pattern on concrete surface. Load and tamp mats directly perpendicular to the stamp-mat surface to prevent distortion in shape of domes. Press and tamp until mortar begins to come through all of the vent holes. Gently remove stamp mats.

4. Trimming: After 24 hours, cut off the tips of mortar formed by the vent holes. 5. Remove residual release agent according to manufacturer's written instructions,

but no fewer than three days after stamping concrete. High-pressure-wash surface and joint patterns, taking care not to damage stamped concrete. Control, collect, and legally dispose of runoff.

3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING



A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.

B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection.

C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete but before float finishing.

D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.

E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by [moisture curing] [moisture-retaining-cover curing] [curing compound] [or] [a combination of these] as follows:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover

concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm) and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears occurring during installation or curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas that have been subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating, and repair damage during curing period.

3.10 PAVING TOLERANCES

A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 117 and as follows:

1. Elevation: 3/4 inch . 2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch , minus 1/4 inch . 3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- (3-m-) long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed

1/2 inch (13 mm). 4. Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge: 1/2

inch per 12 inches (13 mm per 300 mm) of tie bar. 5. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Dowels: 1 inch (25 mm). 6. Vertical Alignment of Dowels: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 7. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge: 1/4

inch per 12 inches (6 mm per 300 mm) of dowel.



8. Joint Spacing: 3 inches (75 mm). 9. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus. 10. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch (3 mm), no minus.

3.11 WHEEL STOPS

A. Install wheel stops in bed of adhesive applied as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Securely attach wheel stops to paving with not less than two steel dowels located at one-quarter to one-third points. Install dowels in drilled holes in the paving and bond dowels to wheel stop. Recess head of dowel beneath top of wheel stop.


A. Testing Agency: Contractor shall engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.

a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when it is 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of three standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one specimen at seven days and two specimens at 28 days.

a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at 28 days.

C. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi .



D. Test results shall be reported in writing to Owner, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Owner but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

F. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Owner.

G. Concrete paving will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

H. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

I. Prepare test and inspection reports.



3.13 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections from joint to joint unless otherwise approved by Owner.

B. Drill test cores, where directed by Owner, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory paving areas with portland cement concrete bonded to paving with epoxy adhesive.

C. Protect concrete paving from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

D. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.




SECTION 323113 - CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Chain-link fences. 2. Gates: swing.


1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete", for post footings.


A. Structural Performance: Chain-link fence and gate framework shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI-7 1. Minimum Post Size and Maximum Spacing: Determine according to CLFMI

WLG 2445, based on mesh size and pattern specified and on the following:

a. Wind Loads: 100 mph b. Exposure Category: C. c. Fence Height: 8 feet. d. Material Group: Schedule 80 galvanized steel pipe

B. Lightning Protection System: Maximum grounding-resistance value of 25 ohms under normal dry conditions.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for chain-link fences and gates. 1. Fence and gate posts, rails, and fittings. 2. Chain-link fabric, reinforcements, and attachments. 3. Accessories: 4. Gates and hardware.

CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 323113 - 1


B. Shop Drawings: 1. Provide shop drawings for chain link vehicle gate.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For the following to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals: 1. Gate hardware.


A. Installer Qualifications: Maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project during all parts of construction of this section.


A. Field Measurements: Verify layout information for chain-link fences and gates shown on Drawings in relation to property survey and existing structures. Verify dimensions by field measurements.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace components of chain-link fences and gates that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Faulty operation of gate mechanism. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering. c. Leaning or Settlement

2. Warranty Period: 1 year from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CHAIN-LINK FENCE FABRIC

A. General: Provide fabric in one-piece heights measured between top and bottom of outer edge of selvage knuckle. Comply with CLFMI Product Manual and with requirements indicated below: 1. Fabric Height: 96 inches. 2. Steel Wire Fabric: Wire with a diameter of 0.192 inch.

a. Mesh Size: 2 inches b. Zinc-Coated Fabric: ASTM A 392, Type II, Class 2, 2.0 oz./sq. ft. with zinc

coating applied before weaving. 3. Selvage: Knuckled at both selvages.



2.2 FENCE FRAMING

A. Posts and Rails: Comply with ASTM F 1043 for framing, including rails, braces, and line; terminal; and corner posts. Provide members with minimum dimensions and wall thickness according to ASTM F 1043 based on the following: 1. Fence Height: 96 inches. 2. Heavy Industrial Strength: Material [Group IA, round steel pipe, Schedule 40.

a. Line Post: 2.375 inches diameter. b. End, Corner and Pull Post: 2.875 inches diameter.

3. Horizontal Framework Members: Intermediate and top rails complying with ASTM F 1043. a. Top and Intermediate Rail: 1.66 inches (42 mm) in diameter.

4. Brace Rails: Comply with ASTM F 1043. 5. Metallic Coating for Steel Framing:

a. Type A, consisting of not less than minimum 2.0-oz./sq. ft. average zinc coating per ASTM A 123/A 123M.

2.3 TENSION WIRE

A. Metallic-Coated Steel Wire: 0.177-inch- (4.5-mm-) diameter, marcelled tension wire complying with ASTM A 817 and ASTM A 824, with the following metallic coating: 1. Type II, zinc coated (galvanized) by hot-dip] [electrolytic] process, with the

following minimum coating weight: a. Class 3: Not less than 0.8 oz./sq. ft. (244 g/sq. m) of uncoated wire

surface.

2.4 SWING GATES

A. General: Comply with ASTM F 900 for gate posts and [single] [double] swing gate types.[ Provide automated vehicular gates that comply with ASTM F 2200.] 1. Gate Leaf Width: See plans. 2. Gate Fabric Height: 96 inches.

B. Pipe and Tubing: 1. Zinc-Coated Steel: Comply with ASTM F 1043 and ASTM F 1083; protective

coating and finish to match fence framing. 2. Gate Posts: Round tubular steel. 3. Gate Frames and Bracing: Round tubular steel.

C. Frame Corner Construction: Welded.

D. Hardware:

1. Hinges: 180-degree inward swing. 2. Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate with provision for padlocking

accessible from both sides of gate.



2.5 FITTINGS

A. General: Comply with ASTM F 626.

B. Post Caps: Provide for each post. 1. Provide line post caps with loop to receive tension wire or top rail.

C. Rail and Brace Ends: For each gate, corner, pull, and end post.

D. Rail Fittings: Provide the following: 1. Top Rail Sleeves: Pressed-steel or round-steel tubing not less than 6 inches

long.

E. Tension and Brace Bands: Pressed steel.

F. Tension Bars: Steel, length not less than 2 inches shorter than full height of chain-link fabric. Provide one bar for each gate and end post, and two for each corner and pull post, unless fabric is integrally woven into post.

G. Truss Rod Assemblies: Steel, hot-dip galvanized after threading, rod and turnbuckle or other means of adjustment.

H. Tie Wires, Clips, and Fasteners: According to ASTM F 626. 1. Standard Round Wire Ties: For attaching chain-link fabric to posts, rails, and

frames, complying with the following: a. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel: 0.148-inch diameter wire; galvanized coating

thickness matching coating thickness of chain-link fence fabric.

I. Finish: 1. Metallic Coating for Pressed Steel or Cast Iron: Not less than 1.2 oz. /sq. ft. zinc.

2.6 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT

A. Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout, recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for a verified survey of property lines and legal boundaries, site clearing, earthwork, pavement work, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Do not begin installation before final grading is completed unless otherwise

permitted by Contract Representative.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts. Do not exceed intervals of 100 feet or line of sight between stakes. Indicate locations of utilities, lawn sprinkler system, underground structures, benchmarks, and property monuments.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install chain-link fencing to comply with ASTM F 567 and more stringent requirements indicated.

3.4 CHAIN-LINK FENCE INSTALLATION

A. Post Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate holes for posts to diameters and spacings indicated, in firm, undisturbed soil.

B. Post Setting: Set posts in concrete at indicated spacing into firm, undisturbed soil. 1. Verify that posts are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing, and

hold in position during setting with concrete or mechanical devices. 2. Concrete Fill: Place concrete around posts to dimensions indicated and vibrate

or tamp for consolidation. Protect aboveground portion of posts from concrete splatter. a. Exposed Concrete: Extend 2 inches above grade; shape and smooth to

shed water.

C. Terminal Posts: Locate terminal end, corner, and gate posts per ASTM F 567 and terminal pull posts at changes in horizontal or vertical alignment of 15 degrees or more.

D. Line Posts: Space line posts uniformly at 10 feet o.c.

E. Post Bracing and Intermediate Rails: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fencing. Diagonally brace terminal posts to adjacent line posts with truss rods and turnbuckles. Install braces at end and gate posts and at both sides of corner and pull posts. 1. Locate horizontal braces at mid-height of fabric, on fences with top rail. Install so

posts are plumb when diagonal rod is under proper tension.

F. Tension Wire: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fencing. Pull wire taut, without sags. Fasten fabric to tension wire with 0.120-inch diameter hog rings of same material and finish as fabric wire, spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c. Install tension wire in locations indicated before stretching fabric. Provide horizontal tension wire at the following locations: 1. Extended along bottom of fence fabric. Install bottom tension wire within 6

inches of bottom of fabric and tie to each post with not less than same diameter and type of wire.

G. Top Rail: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fencing. Run rail continuously through line post caps, bending to radius for curved runs and terminating into rail end attached to posts or post caps fabricated to receive



rail at terminal posts. Provide expansion couplings as recommended in writing by fencing manufacturer.

H. Bottom Rails: Install and secure to posts with fittings.

I. Chain-Link Fabric: Apply fabric to outside of enclosing framework, 2 inches above finish grade or surface and bottom selvage unless otherwise indicated. Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires. Anchor to framework so fabric remains under tension after pulling force is released.

J. Tension or Stretcher Bars: Thread through fabric and secure to end, corner, pull, and gate posts with tension bands spaced not more than 15 inches o.c.

K. Tie Wires: Use wire of proper length to firmly secure fabric to line posts and rails. Attach wire at one end to chain-link fabric, wrap wire around post a minimum of 180 degrees, and attach other end to chain-link fabric per ASTM F 626. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to individuals and clothing. 1. Maximum Spacing: Tie fabric to line posts at 14 inches o.c. and to braces at 24

inches o.c.

L. Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and carriage bolts on the side of the fence opposite the fabric.

3.5 GATE INSTALLATION

A. Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for full opening without interference. Attach fabric as for fencing. Attach hardware using tamper-resistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Gates: Adjust gates to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.

B. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain chain-link fences and gates.




SECTION 328400 - LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Landscape Maintenance: The work of this section shall comply with the latest edition of Landscape Maintenance Specifications / Standards Manual, produced by the Nevada Landscape Association.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Connection to existing irrigation system. 2. Piping. 3. Manual valves. 4. Automatic control valves. 5. Miscellaneous piping specialties. 6. Quick couplers. 7. Drip irrigation specialties. 8. Controllers. 9. Boxes for automatic control valves.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Circuit Piping: Downstream from control valves to sprinklers, specialties, and drain valves. "Lateral Line" piping is under pressure during flow.

B. Main Piping: Downstream from point of connection to water distribution piping to, and including, control valves. "Main Line" piping is under water-distribution-system pressure.

C. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.

D. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

E. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

F. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

G. PA: Polyamide (nylon) plastic.

H. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION 328400 - 1


I. PP: Polypropylene plastic.

J. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

K. Irrigation Conduit: Irrigation conduit (commonly known as "sleeves") for irrigation lines and wiring shall schedule be 40 PVC pipe.


A. Irrigation zone control shall be automatic operation with controller and automatic control valves.

B. Location of Equipment and Specialties: Design location is approximate. Make minor adjustments necessary to avoid plantings and obstructions such as signs and light standards. Maintain 100 percent irrigation coverage of areas indicated.

1.5 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: Within (15) days of award of contract, submit to the Contract Representative (3) copies of a complete list of all materials to be used on the project including pressure ratings, rated capacities, and settings of selected models.

B. Submit (3) copies of a complete material list of all materials to be used on the project. This shall in no way be construed as allowing the substitution of any item for the items specified herein. Equipment or materials installed or furnished without the prior approval of the Contract Representative may be rejected and require the Contractor to remove the materials at their own expense.

C. Manufacturer data on irrigation components.

D. Test results on existing irrigation system backflow prevention.

E. Manufacturer data on other irrigation materials required for a complete and workable installation, but not specifically noted.

1. M.S.D.S. Sheets on all applicable materials. 2. M.S.D.S. Sheets on all applicable materials. 3. Testing Results: Written results of leak, operational testing, leak test and other

tests indicated in specifications.

F. Project Manual: Project manual shall be assembled into each of two (2) three ring binders consisting of the following materials:

1. Manufacturer installation instructions on all equipment. 2. Manufacturer instruction sheets or booklets on all equipment and materials used,

such as fertilizers, PVC primer and glue, irrigation controllers, etc. 3. Submittal information. 4. Approved substitution requests. 5. Irrigation record drawings showing as-built conditions folded into pocket. 6. Written observation reports from Post Construction Establishment. 7. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer see landscape specifications, 329000. 8. Zoning Chart: Show each irrigation zone and its control valve.



9. Controller Timing Schedule: Indicate timing settings for each automatic controller zone.

G. Field quality-control reports.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include items specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures Operation and Maintenance Data," and manufacturer operation and maintenance manuals. Include procedures for the following:

I. Winter shut down procedure:

J. Summer start-up procedure:

K. Operation of irrigation controller and seasonal adjustment of irrigation time:

L. Emergency operation and shut down procedure:

M. Extra Materials: Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Emitters: Equal to 25 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but no fewer than 25 units.

2. Drip-Tube System Tubing: Equal to 20 percent of total length installed for each type and size indicated, but not less than 100 feet.

3. Manual Valve Key or Handle: 2 units including quick coupler key with hose swivel.

4. Special Tools for Normal Maintenance: 1 unit of each type.


A. Installer Qualifications: Provide sufficient experienced workmen and supervisors who shall be present at all times during the execution of the work and who shall be thoroughly familiar with the materials and methods involved. The Owners, for lack of skill on the part or workmen, will make no allowance in the acceptance or rejection of work. Where required by local governing authorities, workmen shall be licensed in the specific task being performed where applicable.



A. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.




A. Site Conditions: Become familiar with all site conditions that may affect this work. Conflicts, discrepancies or conditions in the site conditions that prevent the proper execution of the work, shall be given written direction prior to proceeding. Failure to notify the Contract Representative of discrepancies will make the Contractor liable for execution of the work in the existing site conditions. The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to protect site utilities, constructions and other conditions.

B. Interruption of Existing Water Service: 1. Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless

permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated.

2. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of water service.

3. Do not proceed with interruption of water service without Construction Manager's written permission.

1.9 COORDINATION:

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for protective enclosures. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases in accordance with equipment manufacturer specifications. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.

B. Coordinate installation of irrigation components to avoid conflict with other trades. Conduit (sleeves) shall be installed under paved areas and trenches re-compacted with adequate lead-time prior to paving

C. Existing Irrigation: Provide irrigation equipment removed as part of the project to owner representative for possible salvage. If salvage refused, then remove from site and properly dispose.

D. Existing Trees: Coordinate new landscape improvements with existing trees and other vegetation to be retained, and protect during construction. See section 329000, Planting for allowed construction in the drip lines of existing trees.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONTROL SYSTEMS:

A. Irrigation Controller: Existing irrigation controller, see plans.

B. Irrigation Control Wiring: 1. Control wire shall be 14-gauge minimum for control, 12-gauge minimum for

common. Heavy field wire may be spliced to lighter wire at controller for cabinet access.

2. Wire Splice Connectors: King One Step Wire Connector or equivalent.



2.2 SYSTEM VALVES:

A. Gate valves: 1/2-inch to 3-inch diameter, brass or bronze construction, screw-in bonnet, non rising stem, solid wedge, cross handle, conforming to MSS SP-80. Install no resilient-seated stop valves or similar with washers below grade.

B. Ball Valves: PVC construction, 1/2-inch to 3-inch diameter, threaded, full port, TFE seats, conforming to NSF/ANSI 61-8 Compliant (applicable to sizes 1/2"-2" only.)

C. Drip Irrigation Electric Control Valves: Plastic body with removable top, equipped with a strainer at the control port, in assembly with manual ball valve and basket type filter. Flow: 3.0 to 20.0 GPM (11.4 to 75.7 l/m), Inlet Pressure: 15 to 150 psi (1.0 to 10.3 bar), Regulated Pressure: 40 psi (2.8 bar), Filtration: 200 mesh (75 micron), Temperature: Up to 150° F (66° C)

D. Automatic Drain Valves: Spring-loaded-ball type of corrosion-resistant construction and designed to open for drainage if line pressure drops below 2-1/2 to 3 psig.

2.3 BACKFLOW PREVENTION DEVICE:

A. Existing Reduced Pressure Principle Assembly. Verify proper operation of existing backflow prevention devices.

2.4 PIPE PRODUCTS:

A. PVC Pipe and Fittings: All rigid PVC pipe for the irrigation system including constant pressure mains, laterals, fittings, conduit and sleeves shall be schedule 40 pipe conforming to ASTM D 1785. Fittings for constant pressure mains over 2 1/2-inch size shall be schedule 80 PVC.

B. Detectable Warning Tape: 3-inch wide, minimum 5 mil (0.005-inches) thick, acid, alkaline and corrosion resistant polyethylene tape encasing 20 gauge solid aluminum foil core. Christy’s TA-DT-3-BPW or equivalent.

C. Flexible PVC Tube: Non-rigid vinyl-chloride hose is to be extruded from integrally algae-resistant poly-vinyl chloride (PVC) resin conforming to ASTM Designation D2287 with the following characteristics:

1. Durometer Hardness (A Scale) - 88 to 94 tested per ASTM Method D2240 2. Specific Gravity, nominal - 1.40 to 1.44 tested per ASTM Method D792(A) 3. Tensile Strength, minimum - 1,800 psi tested per ASTM Method D412 4. Brittleness Temp., maximum - 15 C tested per ASTM Method D746(A) 5. The hose to be uniformly black in color, homogeneous throughout and smooth

inside and outside, free from foreign materials, cracks, holes, dents, wrinkles and blisters. The hose should have the following dimensions.

6. Size 1/2 (IPS), Inside Dia. 0.56 in., Wall thickness 0.140 in. Outside Dia 0.84 in. 7. Size 3/4 (IPS), Inside Dia. 0.75 in., Wall thickness 0.150 in. Outside Dia 1.05 in. 8. Size 1 (IPS), Inside Dia. 1.0 in., Wall thickness 0.180 in. Outside Dia 1.375 in. 9. Salco Algae Resistant PVC Flex Hose or equivalent.



D. Flex PVC Riser Assembly: The riser assembly shall consist of PVC algae resistant flexible hose with one ½” PVC male adapter permanently affixed to each end. The risers shall be pre-manufactured in 12”, 24” and 36” lengths. The risers shall be supplied with one drip irrigation emitter attached to one end.

E. Solvent Cements for Joining PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.

F. Irrigation Conduit: Unless required by other codes, conduit for lines and wiring shall be schedule 40 PVC pipe. Minimum size, 2-inch dia. larger than line: 3-inch dia. for wire: 2-inch for drip tube.

G. Swing Joints: Swing joint assemblies at sprinkler heads shall consist of double marlex street ells and sch. 80 nipples for lateral lines. Swing joints on pressure mains shall use sch. 80 ells only (no marlex.)

H. Drip Irrigation Distribution Hose: Brown colored tubing, sized for 17 mm insert fittings. Outside Diameter: 0.634" (16.1mm), Inside Diameter: 0.536" (13.6mm), Wall Thickness: 0.049" (1.2mm).

2.5 WATER EMISSION DEVICES:

A. Drip Irrigation Emitters: Plastic emitters delivering water at rates of 0.5, 1.0 and 2.0 gallons-per-hour (GPH), color coded for volume, with self piercing barbs. Flow: 0.5 to 2.0 gph (1.89 to 7.57 l/h), Pressure: 15 to 50 psi (1.0 to 3.5 bar).

B. Pre-Installed Emitter Tubing: Pre-installed emitter line shall consist of flexible line, approximately 0.5” diameter, with pressure compensating self-filtering emitters equipped with copper plates to prevent root intrusion. See plan for emitter spacing. Pressure: 8.5 to 60 psi (,58 to 4,14 bar), Flow rates: 0.6 and 0.9 gph (2,3 l/hr and 3,5 l/hr), Temperature: Water: Up to 100°F (37,8° C), Ambient: Up to 125°F (51,7° C).

2.6 Valve Boxes:

A. Boxes shall be sized to allow a minimum of six inches of clearance around equipment in box. Box and lid color shall conform to the requirements of local governing authorities where used with water from reclaimed source, otherwise see plan for color.

B. In landscape areas use boxes constructed of engineered plastic, 3,000 lb breaking strength minimum. In paved areas use boxes constructed of polymer concrete with a load rating of H-20. See civil for boxes required to be installed in roadways.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."



B. Install warning tape directly above pressure piping, 12 inches below finished grades, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavement and slabs.

C. Drain Pockets: Excavate to sizes indicated. Backfill with cleaned gravel or crushed stone 12 inches below grade. Cover all sides of gravel or crushed stone with geo-technical fabric for soil separator.

D. Provide minimum cover over top of underground piping according to the following: 1. Irrigation Main Piping: Minimum depth of 18 inches below finished grade. 2. Circuit Piping: 18 inches. 3. Irrigation Conduit: 24 inches . 4. Sub surface irrigation tube at tall fescue seeding: 4-6 inches.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Set stakes to identify locations of proposed irrigation system. Obtain Architect's approval before excavation.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Location and Arrangement: Drawings indicate location and arrangement of piping systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Pipe Installation: 1. Install piping at minimum uniform slope of 0.5 percent down toward drain valves. 2. Install piping free of sags and bends. 3. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing. 4. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. 5. Install unions adjacent to valves and to final connections to other components

with NPS 2-inch or smaller pipe connection. 6. Install expansion loops in control-valve boxes for plastic piping. 7. Lay piping on solid subbase, uniformly sloped without humps or depressions. 8. Install PVC piping in dry weather when temperature is above 40 deg F. Allow

joints to cure at least 24 hours at temperatures above 40 deg F before testing. 9. Install piping in PVC Irrigation Conduit under parking lots, roadways, and

sidewalks.

3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. PVC Connections: 1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings

before assembly.

B. PVC Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.



2. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number, ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

3. PVC Non-pressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.

C. Threaded Joints: 1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads

full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

2. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

3. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

D. Flanged Joints: 1. Select rubber gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application.

Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

E. CONNECTIONS 1. Install piping adjacent to equipment, valves, and devices to allow service and

maintenance. 2. Connect wiring between controller and automatic control valves

3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Shutoff Valves: Install in underground piping in boxes for automatic control valves.

B. Drain Valves: Install in underground piping in boxes for automatic control valves.

3.6 DRIP IRRIGATION SPECIALTY INSTALLATION

A. Install drip tubes with direct-attached emitters as indicated on details.

B. Coordinate installation of Pre-Installed Emitter Tubing with Tall Fescue Seeding area preparation.

C. Install application pressure regulators and filter units included with automatic valve assembly in control-valve boxes.

D. Install air relief valves and vacuum relief valves in piping, and in control-valve boxes.

3.7 AUTOMATIC IRRIGATION-CONTROL SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Existing Irrigation Control System: 1. Coordinate connection of new control wire and valves to existing system where

shown on plans. 2. Install control cable in same trench as irrigation piping, secure below or beside

piping. Install cable in separate PVC irrigation conduit under paved areas.



3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Warning Tapes: Arrange for installation of continuous, underground, detectable warning tapes over underground piping during backfilling of trenches. See Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for warning tapes.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and

retest until no leaks exist. 2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, operate

controllers and automatic control valves to confirm proper system operation. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning

controls and equipment. 4. Any irrigation product will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and

inspections. 5. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.10 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust settings of controllers.

B. Adjust automatic control valves to provide flow rate at rated operating pressure required for each circuit.

C. Adjust equipment, except those intended to be mounted aboveground, so they will be flush with, or not more than 1/2 inch above, finish grade.

3.11 CLEANING

A. Flush dirt and debris from piping before installing sprinklers and other devices.

3.12 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain automatic control valves and drip irrigation emitters and specialties.



3.13 PROJECT CLOSE OUT

A. Record Drawings: Provide "As Built" record drawings, to scale, on reproducible media, of any changes to the irrigation system as illustrated on the plans if components are moved more than six feet from locations shown on plans. Final payment will not be made until record drawings are delivered to Owner.

B. Maintenance: provide maintenance on the system including observation of system to verify proper operation, repairs and adjustment, for a period equal to plant establishment after final acceptance. Flush filers and drip lines, where present, a minimum of twice during the Plant Establishment Period or as needed. The Contractor shall familiarize designated maintenance personnel with the operation and maintenance of the system, including emergency shut-off procedures, the programming and operation of the irrigation controller, and system winterization. Adjust and balance sprinklers and emission devices to provide minimum coverage with minimal runoff due to over spray prior to final Construction Observation.

C. Warranty: Guarantee, for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance of the work, guarantee the installation and operation of the irrigation system. The Contractor at no additional cost to the owner will repair any malfunction or defect, which occurs during this time. If settlement occurs along trenches, the Contractor shall adjust sprinkler heads, soil or sod as necessary to bring the system soil sod or paving to the proper level of permanent grade, at no additional cost to the owner.

END OF SECTION 32 84 00



SECTION 329000 - PLANTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Standard Specifications: In general, landscape site development shall conform to Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, current edition, unless specifically noted otherwise.

C. Nursery Standards: The plant material of this section shall conform to the 2004 edition of the American Standard for Nursery Stock published by the American Association of Nurserymen (ANSI Z60.1-2004).

D. Landscape Maintenance: The work of this section shall comply with the latest edition of Landscape Maintenance Specifications / Standards Manual, produced by the Nevada Landscape Association.

E. Nomenclature, Ornamental Plants: Nomenclature for plant names and varieties shall be in accordance with the latest edition of "Standardized Plant Names" as prepared by the American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Soil preparation: 2. Landscape finish grading: 3. Planting of plant material: 4. Plant material guarantee: 5. Installation of organic ground cover mulch, stone and weed prevention materials: 6. Installation of re-vegetation treatments shown on plans:

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 328400 – Irrigation Systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Balled and Burlapped (B&B) Stock: Exterior plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they are grown, with ball size not less than diameter and depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1-2004 for type and size of tree or shrub required; wrapped, tied, rigidly supported, and drum-laced as recommended by ANSI Z60.1-2004.

B. Container-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted exterior plants grown in a container with well-established root system reaching sides of container and

PLANTING 329000 - 1


maintaining a firm ball when removed from container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and protect root mass during shipping and be sized according to ANSI Z60.1-2004 for kind, type, and size of exterior plant required.

C. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

D. Planting Soil: Native or imported topsoil, manufactured topsoil, or surface soil modified to become topsoil; mixed with soil amendments.

E. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill, before placing planting soil.

F. Rolled Erosion Control Product (RECP): Pre-fabricated product including erosion control blanket manufactured from wood excelsior.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Within (15) days after award of contract, submit to the Contract Representative (3) copies of a complete list of all materials to be used on the project. This shall in no way be construed as allowing the substitution of any item for the items specified herein. Equipment or materials installed or furnished without the prior approval of the Contract Representative may be rejected and the Contractor required removing the materials at his own expense.

1. Listing of sources of all plant materials and seed to be used on the project. 2. Manufacturer data on other landscape materials required for a complete and

workable installation, but not specifically noted. 3. M.S.D.S. Sheets on all applicable materials. 4. Samples for Verification: For each of the following: 5. Minimum 5 lb of mineral mulch and other bulk materials for each color and

texture of material required, in labeled, clean container. 6. Material Test Reports: For existing surface soil and imported planting soil. 7. Planting Schedule: Indicating anticipated planting dates for exterior plants. 8. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by

Owner for maintenance of exterior plants during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required maintenance periods.

B. Project Manual: Project manual shall be assembled into each of two (2) three ring binders consisting of the following materials:

1. Manufacturer installation instructions on any equipment installed as part of this section.

2. Submittal information. 3. Approved substitution requests. 4. Written observation reports from Post Construction Establishment.


A. Installer Qualifications: Maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project during all parts of construction and plant establishment. A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful establishment of exterior plants.

PLANTING 329000 - 2


B. Certification: Current Professional Landcare Network (PLANET) Landscape Industry Certified Technician.

C. Where required by local governing authorities, hold current licensed in the specific task being performed.

D. Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent laboratory, recognized by the State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed.

1. Provide one soil test for each 25,000 square feet of landscape area. 2. Soil test shall include Saturation percent, Soil Texture (percent of sand, silt and

clay), Organic Matter content, Infiltration Rate, pH, Conductivity, Total Dissolved Salts, Cation Exchange Capacity, Sodium Absorption Ratio, Exchangeable Sodium Percent, Potassium, Sodium, Calcium, Nitrate & Phosphate, Sulfate, Chloride, Boron, Zinc, Copper, Iron, & Manganese. Sulfur or Lime Requirement, and Gypsum Requirement.

3. Results shall include recommendations based on analytical results. 4. Collect samples in accordance with the guidelines of the testing agency..

E. Topsoil Analysis: Furnish soil analysis by a qualified soil-testing laboratory stating, at a minimum, percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange capacity; sodium absorption ratio; deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant-nutrient content of topsoil. Include a Complete Landscape Evaluation by a certified Lab; refer to section 1.5.B above.

F. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of exterior plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1-2004, "American Standard for Nursery Stock."

G. Tree and Shrub Measurements: Measure according to ANSI Z60.1-2004 with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position. Do not prune to obtain required sizes. Take caliper measurements 6 inches above ground for trees up to 4-inch caliper size, and 12-inches above ground for larger sizes. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread; do not measure branches or roots tip-to-tip.

H. Observation: Owner Representative may observe trees and shrubs either at place of growth or at site before planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, size, and quality. Owner Representative retains right to observe trees and shrubs further for size and condition of balls and root systems, insects, injuries, and latent defects and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from Project site. Owner Representative may observe other aspects of the landscape installation at any time during construction.

I. Delivery, storage, and handling: 1. Deliver exterior plants freshly dug. 2. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root

systems from sunscald, drying, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of exterior plants during delivery. Do not drop exterior plants during delivery.

3. Handle planting stock by root ball. PLANTING 329000 - 3


4. Deliver exterior plants after preparations for planting have been completed and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set exterior plants trees in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist.

5. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust, or other acceptable material.

6. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting. 7. Water root systems of exterior plants stored on-site with a fine-mist spray. Water

as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist condition.

J. Coordination: 1. Weather Limitations: Perform work only during existing and forecasted weather

conditions favorable to landscape construction and to the health and welfare of plants and soil conditions of the site.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Warrant the following exterior plants, for the warranty period indicated, against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from lack of adequate maintenance, neglect, or abuse by Owner, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control.

B. Warranty Period for Trees and Shrubs: One year from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Warranty Period for Fescue Seeding: 1 year minimum, until establishment of a uniform stand of seeded Fescue grasses with an average height of 4-inches.

D. Warranty Period for Re-vegetation Materials: 1 year minimum, until germination of a uniform stand of seeded vegetation with a density of 30 percent of the native background vegetative cover for the area.

E. Remove dead exterior plants immediately. Replace immediately unless required to plant in the succeeding planting season.

F. Replace exterior plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at end of warranty period.

G. For each plant shown on the drawing, the contractor will be responsible for replacing it during the 1-year warrantee period.

1.7 POST CONSTRUCTION ESTABLISHMENT

A. Trees and Shrubs: Maintain for the following maintenance period by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, restoring planting saucers, tightening and repairing stakes and guy supports, and resetting to proper grades or vertical position, as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray as required keeping trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. Restore or replace damaged tree wrappings.

B. Duration and Timing:

PLANTING 329000 - 4


1. Three months from date of Substantial Completion. 2. When landscape installation is completed on or after September 1, 25% of Post

Planting Care days shall be credited in the fall, 25% shall be credited during the winter (between November 1 and May 1) the remainder shall begin May 2 of the following year. This does not change the Intent of Post Planting Care between Nov. 1 and May 1, except that the contractor may reduce minimum site visits to twice per month. When the project is complete after March 15, Plant Establishment Period shall run continuously for the complete duration indicated.

C. Intent: The intent of this section is for the contractor to carry on continuous work to insure that the complete installation maintains a clean and neat appearance, that the irrigation system operates normally, and that all plant material be established in a thriving condition, and that planting areas are weed free.

D. Horticultural Maintenance: Remove weeds, prune, straighten plant material, adjust mulch and other activities as may be required.

E. Irrigation System Maintenance: Provide maintenance as indicated in Irrigation Section for proper operation of the irrigation system resulting in water delivery for thriving growth of plant material.

F. During the maintenance period the contractor shall visit the site as often as is required to perform the needed maintenance. The contractor shall visit the site a minimum of twice per week.

G. Re-Vegetation: Repair rills or other erosion and remove weeds.

H. Written Reports: Provide written reports of site visits to the owner's representative detailing plant establishment work performed. Reports shall indicate the date, brief description of the weather, personnel present, establishment tasks performed, and any observations relating to future maintenance by the owner. Special maintenance considerations that become apparent during this period shall be brought to the attention of the owner's representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TREE AND SHRUB MATERIAL

A. General: Furnish nursery-grown trees and shrubs complying with ANSI Z60.1-2004, with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sunscald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.

B. Grade: Provide trees and shrubs of sizes and grades complying with ANSI Z60.1-2004 for type of trees and shrubs required. Trees and shrubs of a larger size may be used with a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls.

C. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety and caliper with a securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name.

PLANTING 329000 - 5


2.2 PLANTS

A. Shade Trees: Single-stem trees with straight trunk, well-balanced crown, and intact leader, of height and caliper indicated, complying with ANSI Z60.1-2004 for type of trees required.

B. Small Upright Trees: Branched or pruned naturally according to species and type, with relationship of caliper, height, and branching according to ANSI Z60.1-2004; stem form as follows:

C. Multi-stem Trees: Branched or pruned naturally according to species and type, with relationship of caliper, height, and branching according to ANSI Z60.1-2004; stem form as follows:

D. Shrub Form and Size: Deciduous shrubs with not less than the minimum number of canes required by and measured according to ANSI Z60.1-2004 for type, shape, and height of shrub.

E. Coniferous Evergreens Form and Size: Normal-quality, well-balanced, coniferous evergreens, of type, height, spread, and shape required, complying with ANSI Z60.1-2004.

F. Ground Cover: Provide ground cover of species indicated, established and well rooted in pots or similar containers, and complying with ANSI Z60.1-2004 and the following requirements:

G. Perennials: Provide healthy, field-grown plants from a commercial nursery, of species and variety shown or listed.

2.3 RE-VEGETATION MATERIALS

A. Re-vegetation Seed Mix: See plans

B. Hydraulically Applied Mulch: Wood cellulose fiber mulch.

C. Tackifier/Soil Stabilizer: Material utilizing properties of the muciloid coating of seed shells. Protein content, 1.62%: Ash Content, 2.70%: Fiber, 4.00%: PH of 1% solution, 6.80%: Settle-able Solids, 5.00%: such as Ecology Controls M-Binder or equivalent.

D. Mycorrhizal Inoculants: Product contains nine Endo types of mycorrhizal fungi, Glomus aggregatum, G. etunicatum, G. clarum, G. deserticola, G. intraradices, G. monosporus, G. mosseae, Gigaspora margarita, and Paraglomus brasilianum. Product will also contain eight top types of Ecto mycorrhizal fungi spores – Lacarria laccata, Pisolithus tinctorius, Rhizopogon amylpogon, R. fulvigleba, R. rubescens, R. villosuli, and Scleroderma cepa, S. citrinum. The guaranteed Endo spore count is a minimum 50 spores/cc, and the Ecto spore count is a minimum 50,000 spores/cc.

2.4 PLANTING AREA SOILS

PLANTING 329000 - 6


A. Backfill plant holes using existing soil, free from rock and debris larger than 1”, mixed with 20% humus.

B. Ensure soils are free from base material and other construction debris.

2.5 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. General: If required by soil test, install the soil amendment specified.

B. Copper Sulfate: Type suitable for horticultural use as soil amendment.

C. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, containing a minimum of 90 percent sulfur, with a minimum 99 percent passing through No. 6 sieve and a maximum 10 percent passing through No. 40 sieve.

D. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10 percent sulfur.

E. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated.

F. Agricultural Gypsum: Finely ground, containing a minimum of 90 percent calcium sulfate.

2.6 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. General: If required by soil test, install the soil amendment specified.

B. Humus: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows: pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 3/4-inch sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants.

2.7 FERTILIZER

A. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in a composition indicated by soils test results.

B. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted IBDU fertilizer consisting of minimum 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the composition indicated by soils tests, with 16-16-16 N-P-K analysis.

C. Shrub and Tree Planting Fertilizer: Tablets for container grown stock shall be a 17 gram tablet with 14-3-3 N-P-K analysis.

2.8 MULCHES

PLANTING 329000 - 7


A. Decomposed Granite: D.G. shall consist of 1/8 to 3/8-inch, tan to gold in color. Apply pre-emergent herbicide at manufacturer recommended rate for long term weed prevention prior to installing mulch.

B. Fine Organic Mulch: Fine mulch shall consist of ground bark product, approximately 1/2 to 3/4-inch diameter size, nitrogen stabilized. Use no shredded material that will catch fire easily.

2.9 WEED-CONTROL MATERIALS

A. Pre-Emergent Herbicide: Granular or liquid herbicide.

B. Weed Barrier Fabric: Weed mat material shall consist of geotextile fabric porous allowing transport of air, nutrients and water. Weed mat shall be provided with materials or treated to prevent root tip cell division in root growth. Treatment shall be engineered for slow release, unlikely to leach and migrate through soil, creating a zone where root growth is inhibited. Mat shall have an EPA toxicity rating of class IV, practically nontoxic.

2.10 STAKES AND GUYS

A. Upright and Guy Stakes: Rough-sawn, sound, new hardwood, redwood, or pressure-preservative-treated softwood, free of knots, holes, cross grain, and other defects, 2 by 2 inches by length indicated, pointed at one end.

B. Guy Cable: 5-strand, 3/16-inch- diameter, galvanized-steel cable, with zinc-coated turnbuckles, a minimum of 3 inches long, with two 3/8-inch galvanized eyebolts.

C. Hose Chafing Guard: Reinforced rubber or plastic hose at least 1/2 inch in diameter, black, cut to lengths required to protect tree trunks from damage.

2.11 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS

A. Anti-desiccant: Water-insoluble emulsion, permeable moisture retarder, film forming, for trees and shrubs. Deliver in original, sealed, and fully labeled containers and mix according to manufacturer's written instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, and lawns and existing exterior plants from damage caused by planting operations.

B. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

PLANTING 329000 - 8


C. Loosen landscape planting and re-vegetation areas compacted by construction equipment to a depth of 8-inches. Use care to maintain loosened condition during remainder of work, re-loosen if needed. Remove all rocks, roots or other debris larger than 1-inch in any dimension from the landscape areas.

D. Verify the locations of all underground utilities or other improvements prior to loosening to prevent damage. Bring areas of poor drainage or puddling, areas contaminated by petro-chemical products, and areas of excessive construction debris to the attention of the contract representative for written direction prior to proceeding.

E. Existing Trees: Coordinate new landscape improvements with existing trees and other vegetation to be retained, and protect during construction. Grading shall be done by hand in the drip line of existing trees.

3.2 EXISTING PLANT PRESERVATION

A. Protective Designators: 1. Flagging. Plants to be retained within 50 feet of a construction area shall be

flagged with fluorescent orange vinyl tape visible to workers operating construction equipment. Plants may be flagged individually or as a group, along all areas of possible access or intrusion by construction equipment. Tape shall be supported at a minimum of 25-foot intervals by wrapping trees or utilizing to be visible to workers operating construction equipment.

2. Protective Fencing. In those situations where a protected tree is so close to the construction area that construction equipment will infringe on the root system, a protective fence may be required between the tree and the construction activity.

3. Bark Protection. In situations where a protected tree remains in the immediate area of intended construction, the bark shall be protected by enclosing the entire circumference of the trunk with 2 inch x 4-inch lumber encircled with wire or other means that do not damage the tree.

B. Prohibited Activities Adjacent to Protected Plants: 1. Material Storage. No materials intended for use in construction, or waste

materials accumulated due to excavation or demolition, shall be placed within the limits of the critical root zone of any protected tree.

2. Equipment Cleaning/Liquid Disposal. Clean no equipment, allow no materials or liquids to be deposited or flow over land, within the limits of the critical root zone of a protected tree. This includes, without limitation, paint, oil, solvents, asphalt, concrete, mortar or similar materials.

3. Vehicular Traffic and Parking. No vehicular and/or construction equipment traffic or parking shall take place within the limits of the critical root zone of any protected tree other than on an existing paved street or parking lot. This restriction does not apply to single incident access within the critical root zone for purposes of clearing underbrush, establishing the building pad and associated lot grading, vehicular traffic necessary for routine utility maintenance or emergency restoration of utility service or routine mowing operations.

C. Permitted construction methods 1. Boring. Boring of utilities under plants to be preserved may be done. The length

of the bore shall be at a minimum the width of the critical root zone, and shall be at a minimum depth of 48 inches.

PLANTING 329000 - 9


2. Grade Change. Grade changes within the critical root zone of a protected tree shall not exceed 2 inches.

3. Trenches. All trenching shall be designed to avoid crossing the critical root zone of any plant to be retained.

4. Root Pruning. All roots 2 inches or larger in diameter which are exposed as a result of trenching or other excavation, shall be cut off and covered with pruning compound within 2 hours of initial exposure.

5. Maintenance: The contractor shall maintain all plant materials to be retained in areas of the project site where work is included on the irrigation system in the project limits. Plants shall be maintained in vigorous and healthy condition, free of weeds and litter. This maintenance shall include weeding, watering, fertilizing, pruning, mulching and other needed maintenance, in accordance with generally accepted horticultural practices. This shall including using pruning standards accepted by the International Society of Arboriculture and/or the National Arborist Association.

3.3 FINISH LANDSCAPE GRADING:

A. Finish grades for the project shall be smooth with no abrupt change of slope and shall be brought to a plane in conformance to the elevations shown on the Plans. Grades shall be such that the finish surface of landscape areas shall be 1-inch below the surface of adjacent paving or curbs. The storm drain systems and patterns established by the grading contractor shall be maintained, in accordance with the civil drawings. Maintain maximum 3:1 slope in planter areas.

3.4 PLANTING BED ESTABLISHMENT

A. Finish Grading: Grade planting beds to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Maintain storm drainage patterns and swales as established by site grading contractor in accordance with the Civil Plans.

B. Restore planting beds if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading and before planting.

3.5 PLANTING PIT EXCAVATION

A. Planting Pits: Excavate circular pits with sides sloped inward. Trim base leaving center area raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage. Do not further disturb base. Scarify sides of plant pit smeared or smoothed during excavation.

B. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter for balled and burlapped and container-grown stock.

C. Subsoil removed from excavations may be used as backfill after amendment.

D. Obstructions: Notify Owner Representative if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or shrubs are encountered in excavations.

PLANTING 329000 - 10


E. Poor Drainage – If water does not drain from the dug plant pits within 3 hours, drill 6-inch diameter holes through the hardpan. Refer to soil boring logs on the civil plans.

F. Fill excavations with water and allow infiltration into soil before positioning trees and shrubs. Notify Owner Representative if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or retention in tree or shrub pits.

3.6 TREE AND SHRUB PLANTING

A. Set B&B stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of root ball 1 inch above adjacent finish grades.

B. Remove burlap and wire baskets from tops of root balls and partially from sides, but do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation.

C. Place planting soil mix around root ball in layers, tamping to settle mix and eliminate voids and air pockets. When pit is approximately one-half backfilled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of planting soil mix.

D. Set container-grown stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of root ball 1 inch above adjacent finish grades.

E. Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant.

F. Place planting soil mix around root ball in layers, tamping to settle mix and eliminate voids and air pockets. When pit is approximately one-half backfilled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of planting soil mix.

G. Organic Mulching: Apply 2-inch average thickness of organic mulch extending 12 inches beyond edge of root ball. Do not place mulch within 4-inches of trunks or stems.

3.7 TREE AND SHRUB PRUNING

A. Prune trees and shrubs according to standard horticultural practice to remove only injured or dead branches and to retain natural character. Do not cut tree leaders, remove only injured or dead branches from flowering trees.

3.8 GUYING AND STAKING

A. Upright Staking and Tying: Stake trees of less than 3-inch caliper. Stake trees of less than 2-inch caliper only as required to prevent wind tip-out. Install guys if required to stabilize trees in wind. Use a minimum of 2. Set vertical stakes and space to avoid penetrating root balls or root masses. Support trees with two strands of tie wire encased in hose sections at contact points with tree trunk. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree.



B. Attach indicators to each guy wire in accordance with details.

3.9 PLANTING BED MULCHING

A. Install no mulch against plant stems, maintain 4-inch clearance.

B. Install mulches to a depth of 4-inches. Surface of mulches shall be 1-inch below the surface of adjacent paving.

C. Install pre-emergent herbicide and weed barrier fabric in all landscape areas. Apply herbicide at manufacturer's suggested rate for long-term weed control. Ensure that planting beds are weed free prior to application.

3.10 TALL FESCUE SEEDING

A. Install fescue seeding and associated materials to the area indicated on plans. Coordinate soil preparation and seeding with installation of sub-surface drip tube.

B. Till areas compacted by construction activities to a depth of 12-inches.Where tall fescue seeding is installed, prepare site areas to a smooth, stable and un-compacted state.

C. Apply Humus at a rate of 2 cubic yards per 1,000 square feet, Slow Release Fertilizer at a rate of 8 pounds per 1,000 square feet and evenly incorporate into planting area soil to a depth of 6 inches.

D. Install Copper Sulfate at a rate of 0.2 (2 tenths) pound per 1,000 square feet. Dissolve dry products in 2 gallons water and apply to soil surface.

E. Install Mycorrhizal Inoculants in areas noted on plans in accordance with supplier specifications, incorporating into top 1 to 2 inches site soil.

F. Uniformly distribute seed over site areas indicated on the plans using manual or mechanical methods compatible with seed and site conditions. Conduct no seeding during windy conditions.

G. Rake seeded area immediately to incorporate seed into soil surface to a depth of 1/8 to 1/4 inch. Roll seed bed with water filled roller to ensure close seed soil contact.

H. Apply hydro-mulch after seeding, at a rate of 1,000 lbs. per acre, with tackifier at a rate of 180 pounds per acre.

I. Allow no traffic on the seed bed through the duration of the Post Construction Establishment.

J. Sub-surface irrigation is used on the seeded area. Temporary overhead sprinkler irrigation may be used at no additional cost to owner for germination and establishment of Fescue seeding.



K. Completed installation will be acceptable when the seed bed is established with a uniform stand of Fescue grass with an average height of 4-inches. The planting shall be inspected at which time documentation of compliance with specified materials and installation requirements shall be provided. Remove no more than 1/3 of the blade length at any one mowing during establishment.

3.11 DISTURBED AREA STABILIZATION AND REVEGETATION

A. Install and apply re-vegetation treatments to the areas indicated on plans in the fall after temperatures have dropped to prevent germination. Provide temporary irrigation if installed during growing conditions at no additional cost to owner.

B. Where re-vegetation seeding is installed, prepare site areas to a roughened, stable but un-compacted state. Till areas compacted by construction activities to a depth of 12-inches.

C. Install Mycorrhizal Inoculants in areas noted on plans in accordance with supplier specifications, incorporating into top 1 to 2 inches site soil.

D. Install specified seed mix at the rate indicated on the plans by drill seeding.

E. Apply hydro-mulch after seeding, at a rate of 1,000 lbs. per acre, with tackifier at a rate of 180 pounds per acre.

F. Allow no traffic on re-vegetation area through the duration of the Post Construction Establishment.

G. Notify Owner Representative (7) days prior to installation of re-vegetation materials for site observation. Completed installation shall be inspected at which time documentation of compliance with specified materials and installation requirements shall be provided. At the conclusion of the Plant Material Warranty, there shall be no significant evidence of rills, gullies or other evidence of erosion, or significant stands of weeds. If adequate coverage is not achieved, re-seed, re-mulch, provide temporary irrigation and/or implement weed control at no additional cost to owner.

3.12 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION

A. During exterior planting, keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition.

B. Protect exterior plants from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other contractors and trades, and others. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged exterior planting.

3.13 DISPOSAL

A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.


SNJCC New Cafeteria & Demolition of Existing Cafeteria END OF SECTION 32 90 00

X:\Projects\08005.00\_Docs\Land\Specs\Planting 090909.doc



SECTION 330523.16 - JACKING, AUGERING AND MINING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Pipeline installation in casing pipe beneath highways, railroads and

other structures may be installed by jacking and augering or by jacking and mining.

B. Related Work Specified in Other Sections Includes:

1. Section 312316 – Excavation - Earth and Rock

2. Section 314000 – Shoring, Sheeting and Bracing

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Codes and standards referred to in this Section are:

1. ASTM C 76 - Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe 2. ASTM A 139 - Specification for Electric-Fusion (Arc) -Welded Steel Pipe (NPS in 4 in. and Over) 3. OSHA PL-91-596 - Occupational Safety Health Act of 1970 Public Law 91-596

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide all submittals, including the following, as specified in Division 1.

1. Working drawings of the jacking pipe, jacking frame, jacking head, reaction

blocks, sheeting, including design calculations and the complete jacking installa-tion.

2. Necessary permit applications and approvals by the appropriate authority.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store and handle all products and materials as specified in Division 1.

JACKING, AUGERING AND MINING 330523.16 - 1


PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Use one of the following for casing piping.

1. Spiral Weld or smooth wall steel pipe, meeting the requirements of ASTM A 139, Grade B. The minimum casing pipe size and wall thickness shall be as shown in the following table, for the carrier pipe size indicated.

For PVC and HDPE Pressure Carrier Pipes

Carrier Pipe Casing Pipe Casing Pipe Nominal Size Nominal Diameter Wall Thickness

Inches

2 Inches 10

Inches 0.250

4 14 0.250 6 16 0.250 8 18 0.250

10 20 0.250 12 24 0.312 14 28 0.312 16 30 0.312 18 34 0.375 20 36 0.375 24 42 0.500

For Gravity Sewer Carrier Pipes

Carrier Pipe Casing Pipe Casing Pipe

Nominal Size Nominal Diameter Wall Thickness

Inches 8

Inches 14

Inches 0.250

10 16 0.250 12 20 0.250 15 24 0.312 18 26 0.312 21 30 0.312 24 32 0.375 27 36 0.375

B. Fill Material: Use fill material consisting of 1-1/4 pounds of Bentonite per gallon of wa-

ter during jacking to fill any voids between pipe and the earth.



PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATIO

N

A. Casing Pipe:

1. Install all casing pipe in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and approved shop drawings and as specified in Division 1.

2. The provisions of this section shall represent the minimum standards for the

installation of casing pipe for sewer force main or water main pipeline.

3. Submit the necessary permit documents and data to the appropriate authority and receive approval thereof. Maintain traffic on the roadway and keep all workmen and equipment clear of the travelway during the work. Comply with all Federal, State and County safety regulations and any per-mit(s).

4.. Use a simultaneous and continuous installation of any dry boring and jacking

operation until the casing pipe is in final position. Maintain correct line and grade. Use full-ring welded add-on sections of casing pipe, developing wa-ter-tight total pipe strength joints. Casing welders shall be certified welders. A copy of the certification shall be furnished to the Owner of Record or de-signee prior to the welding procedure. Produce shall produce no upheaval, settlement, voids, cracking, movement or distortion of the existing roadbed or other facilities or structures during the casing installation. Fill any voids with 1:3 portland cement grout at sufficient pressure for roadway protection. Following placement of the carrier pipe within the steel casing, install masonry plugs at each open end. Plugs shall be suitable for restraining the exter-nal earth load, while allowing internal drainage.

9. Mechanically bore casing pipe holes through the soil by a cutting head on a

continuous auger mounted inside the pipe. Extend the auger a maximum of 2 inches beyond the end of the casing pipe to preclude formation of voids out-side the pipe shell. Auger should not be of a greater diameter than the outside diameter of the encasement.

10. Adequately protect the casing pipe to prevent crushing or other damage

under jacking pressures. Provide backstops for adequately distributing the jack thrust without causing deformation of the soil or other damage.

11. In the event of obstruction, withdraw auger, cut and cap excess pipe and fill

void with 1:3 portland cement grout under sufficient pressure



12. Excavate and maintain required boring or jacking pits or shafts to the minimum dimension. Adequately barricade, sheet, brace and dewater exca-vation as required.

13. Deviation from approved jack and bore methods and above specifications is

grounds for work stoppage and line replacement at the expense of the CONTRACTOR.

B. Casing Spacers:

1. Use Stainless Steel Casing Spacers being on center and restrained as the

preferred method for installing the carrier pipe. Use skids installed with 6 ft to 10 ft spacing o r as recommended by the manufacturer. After the carrier pipe has been tested for leakage, block the casing ends with casing spacer end seals with stainless steel bands. Upsizing casings may be required for PVC push on pipe with EBAA restrained bells. No extra payment will be made for this upsizing.

2. The minimum casing pipe inside diameters needed for restrained carrier

pipe are as follows:

MINIMUM CASING PIPE INSIDE DIAMETER NEEDED FOR RESTRAINED CARRIER PIPE

DUCTILE IRON MECHANICAL JOINT WITH MEGALUG RESTRAINT

EBAA Product Nominal Carrier Pipe Size (in.)

Diameter (in.) Min. Steel Casing

ID (in.) 1104 4 9.90 13 1106 6 12.00 15 1108 8 14.15 17 1110 10 16.20 19 1112 12 18.30 21.5 1114 14 20.94 23.5 1116 16 22.90 25.5 1118 18 25.00 28 1120 20 27.10 30 1124 24 32.64 35 1130 30 38.87 41 1136 36 45.17 48 1142 42 55.57 58 1148 48 61.87 64

PVC PUSH ON PIPE WITH EBAA RESTRAINED BELLS

EBAA Product Nominal Carrier Pipe Size (in.)

Diameter (in.) Min. Steel Casing

ID (in.) 1504 4 10.13 12.5 1506 6 12.63 15 1508 8 15.50 18 1510 10 17.73 20 1512 12 21.25 24



1114HV 14 24.25 26.5 1116HV 16 26.50 28.5 1120HV 20 31.00 34 1124HV 24 35.50 38 1130HV 30 42.38 45

C. Augering: Conduct augering with the proper equipment and procedure such that the carrier pipe and the casing pipe can be installed to the grades specified without disturbing the adjacent earth. Submit all equipment and procedures for prior approval.


SNJCC New Cafeteria & Demolition of Existing Cafeteria 02/10

D. Hand Mining: Conduct hand mining only in casings that are sufficiently large

enough to permit such operation. Provide adequate fresh air supply within the cas-ing pipe and conduct all operations in accordance with the requirements of the U.S. Department of Labor Safety and Health Regulations for Construction promulgated under the Occupational Safety and Health Act 7 1970 (PL-91-596).

E. Jacking Pit: Make the jacking pit of adequate length to provide room for the

jacking frame, the jacking head, the reaction blocks, the jacks, auger rig, and the jacking pipe. Make the pit sufficiently wide to allow ample working space on each side of the jacking frame. Make the depth of the pit such that the invert of the pipe, when placed on the guide frame, is at the elevation desired for the completed line.

F. Jacking Frame: Use a jacking frame that applies a uniform pressure over the

entire pipe wall area of the pipe to be jacked.

G. Reaction Blocks: Use reaction blocks designed to carry the thrust of the jacks to the soil without excessive soil deflection and in such a manner as to avoid any dis-turbance of adjacent structures or utilities.

H. Operation: Use hydraulic jacks in the jacking operation. Use extreme care to hold

the pipe to exact line and grade. Advance the excavation at the heading manually or with an auger. Do not allow the advance to exceed one foot ahead of the casing pipe. Make every effort to avoid loss of earth outside the casing

I. Safety Railing: Provide a safety railing all around the top of the pit at all times.

J. Restore property and surface conditions to the original condition.

K. Carrier Pipe:

Utilize joint restrained pipe for the entire water main or force main pipe length inside the casing. Use special supporting of the carrier pipe within the casing with a design approved by the County Manager or designee.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 331100 – WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Materials and procedures for construction.

2. Delivery, storage, and handling of piping.



1. C900-PVC Piping


A. Water distribution pipe, fittings, joint and coupling materials. Submit manufacturer’s standard drawings or catalog cuts.

B. Design calculations of water piping.

C. Manufacturer’s instructions for water piping delivery and storage.


A. Materials and equipment shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products for at least three years

B. Comply with the rules and regulations of the public water lines and the extension and/or modifications to public utility systems.

C. Comply with the rules and regulations of the Local Water Purveyor Truckee Meadows Water Authority (TMWA), and Washoe County Health Department having jurisdiction for potable water-service.

WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 331100 - 1


D. Comply with rules and regulations of Local authorities (City of Reno Fire) having jurisdiction for fire-suppression water-service piping including materials, hose threads, installation and testing.

E. Where installation procedures or any part thereof are required to be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the material being installed, printed copies of these recommendations shall be furnished to the SNJCC Project Manager prior to installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE

A. PVC, AWWA Pipe: AWWA C900 with bell end with gasket, and with spigot end.

2.2 DISINFECTION CHLORINE

A. Liquid chlorine: AWWA B301

B. Sodium Hypochlorite: AWWA B300 with 5 percent to 15 percent available chlorine.

C. Calcium hypochlorite: AWWA B300 supplied in granular form of 5 gram tablets, and shall contain 65 percent chlorine by weight.

2.3 WARNING TAPE

A. Warning tape shall be standard, 4 millimeter Polyethylene, 3 inch wide tape, non-detectable type, blue with black letters and imprinted with “CAUTION BURIED WATER LINE BELOW”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATION

A. Underground water-service piping shall be C900-PVC.

B. PVC piping shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and AWWA C605. Place selected material and thoroughly compacted to one foot above the top of the pipe.

C. Install Copper Tracer Wire, No. 14 AWG solid, single conductor, insulated. Install in the trench with piping to allow location of the pipe with electronic detectors. The wire shall not be spiraled around the pipe nor taped to the pipe. Wire connections are to be made by stripping the insulation from the wire and soldering with rosin core solder per ASTM 828. Solder joints shall be wrapped with rubber tape and electrical tape. At least every 1000 feet (300 m) provide a 5 pound (2.3 kg) magnesium anode attached to the main



tracer wire by solder. The solder joint shall be wrapped with rubber tape and with electrical tape. An anode shall also be attached at the end of each line.

3.2 ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION

A. Install water-distribution piping with restrained joints. Anchorages and restrained-joint types that may be used include: concrete thrust blocks, locking mechanical joints, set-screw mechanical retainer glands, bolted flanged joints.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Install water service lines to a point of connection within approximately 5 feet (1500 mm) outside of building(s) to which service is to be connected and make connections thereto. If building services have not been installed provide temporary caps and mark for future connection.


A. Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after concrete thrust blocks have hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use only potable water.

B. Perform hydrostatic tests at not less than one-and-one-half times working pressure for two hours. 1. Increase pressure in 50-psi (350-kPa) increments and inspect each joint between

increments. Hold at test pressure for 1 hour; decrease to 0 psi (0 kPa). Slowly increase again to test pressure and hold for 1 more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quarts (1.89 L) per hour per 100 joints. Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat test until leakage is within allowed limits.

C. Prepare reports of testing activities.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Purge new water-distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired before use.

B. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by local utility provider (TMWA) or, if method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in AWWA C651 or do as follows: 1. Fill the water system with a water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 ppm of

chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 24 hours. 2. Drain the system of the previous solution and refill with water/chlorine solution

containing at least 200 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow system to stand for 3 hours.



3. After standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine remains in water coming from system.

4. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure if biological examination shows evidence of contamination.

C. Prepare reports of purging and disinfecting activities.




SECTION 331200 - WATER VALVES AND APPURTENANCES PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required and install com-

plete and ready for operation all valves and appurtenances as shown on the Draw-ings and as specified herein.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Codes, specifications, and standards referred to by number or title form a part of

this Section to the extent required by the references to codes, specifications, and standards. Latest revisions, as of the date of bid opening, apply, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or specified in this Section.

B. Stand-

ards

Designation Title ANSI/AWWA Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron and C111/A21.11 Gray-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings

ANSI/AWWA Gate Valves C500

ANSI/AWWA Resilient-Seated Gate Valves 3 through 12 NPS, C509 for Water and Sewage Systems

ANSI/AWWA Air Release, Air/Vacuum, and Combination Air Valves for C512 Waterworks Service

ANSI/B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 125

ANSI/B16.3 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Class 150 and 300

ANSI/B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Steel Nickel Alloy and

Other Special Al-loys

ASTM A276 Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars

and Shapes

ASTM A231 Specification for Steel Casting, Austenitic, for High- Temperature Service

WATER VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 331200 - 1


MSS SP-60 Connecting Flange Joint Between Tapping Sleeves and Tapping Valves

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. References to valve sizes on the Drawings and in the Specifications are intended

to be nominal size, and shall be interpreted as nominal size. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: as specified in:

1. General Conditions;

2. Supplementary General Conditions;

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL:

A. All valves and appurtenances shall be of the size shown on the Drawings and as

far as possible all equipment of the same type shall be from one manufacturer.

B. All valves and appurtenances shall have the name of the maker and the working pressure for which they are designed cast in raised letters upon some appropriate part of the body.

2.2 DESIGN

A. Resilient, Wedge or Gate Valves and Boxes

1. Valves for pipe less than 2 inches in diameter shall conform to the

requirements of AWWA C509 or C515 (latest revisions) and shall be cast iron, single wedge, non-rising stem, screwed bonnet, 125 pounds S.P., 200 pounds W.O.G with stuffing box repackable under pressure and all parts renewable. Ends shall be as shown or indicated on the drawings.

2. Resilient, wedge or gate valves 2 inches in diameter and larger shall be cast

or ductile iron body, non-rising stem, bronze mounted gate valves, mechanical joint conforming to requirements of the AWWA Standard C509 or C515 and shall be provided with a 2 inch square operating nut with the word “open” and an arrow cast in the metal to indicate direction. Valves shall be resilient, wedge, or gate type and shall turn to the left (counter clockwise) to open. The wedge or gate shall be cast iron or ductile iron per ASTM A536, minimum 65,000-psi strength and, completely encapsulated with urethane rubber, per-manently bonded to the wedge or gate to meet ASTM test for rubber metal bond, ASTM D429. The valve stems for non-rising stem assemblies shall



be cast bronze with integral collars in full compliance with AWWA. OS & Y stems shall be on bronze bar stock. The NRS stem stuffing box shall be the O-ring seal type with two rings located above thrust collar; the two rings shall be replaceable with valve fully open and subjected to full rated working pres-sure. The minimum safe working pressure shall be 200 psi.

3. There shall be two low torque thrust bearings located above and below the

stem collar. The stem nut shall be independent of wedge and shall be made of solid bronze. There shall be a smooth unobstructed waterway free of all pockets, cavities and depressions in the seat area. The body and bonnet shall be coated with fusion-bonded epoxy both interior and exterior. Each valve shall have the manufacturers name, pressure rating and year manufac-tured cast on body. The valve shall be designed and tested to be opened and closed under a differential pressure of at least twice the working pressure.

B. Valves for Buried Service

1. Valves for buried service shall meet all the requirements as specified herein

for interior except that buried valves shall have mechanical joint ends.

2. All buried valves shall have cast-iron two piece valve boxes as specified in the drawings. Valve boxes shall be provided with suitable heavy bonnets to extend to such elevation at the finished grade surface. The barrel shall be two-piece, screw type. The upper section shall have a flange at the bottom having sufficient bearing area to prevent settling, shall be designed so as to prevent the transmission of surface loads directly to the valve or piping, and shall be complete with cast iron covers. Covers shall have "WATER" cast into the top. The covers shall be so constructed as to prevent tipping or rat-tling.

3. Where valves are located out of pavement, the boxes shall be adjusted to finished grade with a concrete collar as shown in the Details.

4. Valve boxes shall be of the heavy duty, traffic bearing cast iron, adjustable

screw type with a drop cover. The valve box assembly shall consist of a bot-tom section, top section and cover which is cast from gray iron, formulated to ASTM specification A-48 latest revision, minimum tensile of 21,000 psi and shall be free from blowholes, shrinkage or other imperfections not true to pattern. The shaft size shall be 5 1/4" and the ad-justable length shall be from 18" to 36". The wall thickness shall be 1/4". The weight of the assembly shall be 61 pounds + 2 pounds, with the cover weight being a minimum of 13 pounds.

5. The name of the manufacturer and foundry of origin shall be cast into each

of the components of the assembly in legible form. The assembly shall be suitable for highway traffic wheel loads of 16,000 pounds and shall withstand a proof load test of 25,000 pounds without failure or permanent deflection.

C. Check Valves



1. All check valve bodies shall be cast iron per ASTM A126 Class B, having integral (not wafer) flanges.

2. The seat shall be centrifugally cast bronze with an O-ring seal and be locked

in place with stainless steel lock screws and be field replaceable, without the use of special tools.

3. Swing check valves shall have a shaft of single and continuous stainless

steel, extending both sides of the body with a lever and weight. The air cush-ion cylinder, when specifically required, shall be constructed of cor-rosion resistant material and the piston shall be totally enclosed within the cylinder and not open at one end. The air cushion cylinder assembly shall be externally attached to either or both sides of the valve body and shall permit adjustability to cushion the closure of the valve. Cushioning shall be by air trapped in the cushion cylinder, which shall be fitted with a one-way adjustable control check valve to cushion disc contact to the seat at the shut-off point. The bottom cylinder head shall be swivel mounted and not rigid to follow the change of force angles as the lever raises or lowers to open or close the check valve. Valve shall prevent backflow on normal pump shut off or power failure, at zero velocity and be watertight. The disc shall be cast iron utilizing a double clevice hinge connected to a ductile iron disc arm. The disc arm assembly shall be suspended from a stainless steel shaft, which passes through a seal retainer on both sides of the valve body.

5. Valve exterior to be painted with Red Oxide Phenolic Primer Paint as

accepted by the FDA for use in contact with Potable Water. Materials shall be certified to the following ASTM specifications:

a. Body, cover & disc - Cast Iron - ASTM A126, Class B

b. Disc Arm - Ductile Iron - ASTM A536

c. Seat - Aluminum Bronze or Stainless Steel - ASTM B148, ASTM A276

d. Cushion cylinder - Corrosion-resistant Commercial material

D. Backflow Prevention Devices

1. Backflow prevention devices shall be reduced pressure principle assemblies or double check assemblies and shall be USC approved, and shall meet all requirements of the Truckee Meadows Water Authority.

E. Heated Fiberglass Enclosures

1. The enclosure, certified to ASSE 1060, shall be of min. 1/8" tk. thixotropic pol-yester resin reinforced with fiberglass strand.

2. Molded exteriors will be a smooth finish, protected w/UV inhibited isopthalic polyester gel coat.



3. Insulation shall be min. 1-1/4" tk. (R8), uni-cellular, non-wicking, polyisocyanate foam.

4. Enclosure shall utilize a lockable flip top design, for maintenance access through lid without removal of the entire unit. Molded product shall utilize an overlapping lid seam design for weather proofing and vandal resistance.

5. Drains shall be sized for full port backflow discharge and designed for “one way” exit, inhibiting intrusion of debris and/or vermin.

6. Enclosure shall be anchored to a concrete slab or GLASSPAD™ from within the enclosure w/steel anchors and require a single lock for security purposes.

7. Heat will protect the piping and equipment from exterior temperatures to -30°F and be thermostatically controlled. UL or ETL listed self-regulating cable(s) or wall mounted air heater(s) will be sized to maintain the equipment at +40°F, in accordance with N.F.P.A. 3-3.1.8 & 3-6.1.3.2. Heat source shall be mounted a minimum of 7" above the slab unless it is UL or ETL certified and NEC ap-proved for submersion. Power source shall be installed inside the enclosure by others, protected with a ground fault interrupting receptacle (GFI) or GFI circuit – ref. UL 943, N.E.M.A.3R.

F. Combination Air Release Valves for Potable Water and Non-Potable Irrigation

Systems

1. Air release valves shall exhaust large quantities of air during the filling of a pipeline or vessel. The valve shall be capable of venting air up to sonic veloc-ity without blowing shut; closing only after all the air has been vented. The valve shall continue to release small quantities of air under pressure as often as needed to keep the system free of accumulated air. The valve shall auto-matically open to allow air to re-enter during draining or whenever a negative pressure occurs.

2. Combination air valves shall be of the size shown on the plans and conform

to the requirements of AWWA C512 and be of the “Kinetic” design capable of exhausting air at up to sonic velocity without blowing shut.

3. Body and cover shall be ASTM A126 Class B cast iron with stainless steel

floats and replaceable seats of Buna-N or other suitable material. Internal linkage mechanism shall be 18-8 stainless steel. Plastic or bronze compo-nents are not acceptable. Air release orifice shall be suitable for 300 PSI maximum working pressure. Screens shall be installed on the opening of all air release valves.

4. Valves 3-inch size and smaller shall have a threaded inlet connection, and larger valves shall have a flanged inlet faced and drilled per ANSImB16.1 Class 250.

5. Valves shall have a threaded outlet on valves to 4-inch size and a protective

cowl on larger sizes.



6. 1 inch NPT inlet and outlet shall be provided, unless otherwise specified on

the drawings.

7. Connections from corporation stops to air release valves shall be brass for rigidity.

G. Tapping Valves and Sleeves

1. All tapping sleeve and valve assemblies shall meet the requirements of

AWWA Standard C500, latest revision. Cast iron tapping sleeves or stainless steel wrap-around sleeves, and cast iron valves shall be used to make live taps into the existing water mains where shown on the drawings. Sleeve bodies must be of stainless steel. The flanges must conform to AWWA C207 Class D ANSI 150# drilling. All bolts and nuts shall be as speci-fied.

2. CONTRACTOR shall verify type of existing main prior to ordering. The

tapping valve shall have an inlet flange to match the sleeve and a me-chanical joint outlet for connection to water main pipe. Tapping valve shall meet the requirements for gate valves specified herein. The sleeve shall have provisions for a tap and shall be pressure tested at 150 psi for a minimum of 30 minutes prior to tapping.

H. Service Connection Materials

1. Service Saddles shall be in accordance with the Truckee Meadows Water Au-thority Plans.

2. Water Meters

a. Water meters shall be in accordance with the Truckee Meadows Water

Authority Plans.

3. Corporation Stops for Service Connections

a. Corporation stops shall be in accordance with the Truckee Meadows Water Authority Plans.

4. Water Service Tubing

a. Water service connection tubing shall be in accordance with the

Truckee Meadows Water Authority Plans.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION



A. Install all valves and appurtenances in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and in the locations shown, true to alignment and rigidly supported

B. After installation, test all valves and appurtenances for at least one hour at the

working pressure corresponding to the class of pipe, unless a different test pressure is specified

C. Install all floor boxes, brackets, extension rods, guides, the various types of

operators and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings that are in masonry floors or walls, and install concrete inserts for hangers and supports as soon as forms are erected and before concrete is poured. Before setting these items, check all plans and figures, which have a direct bearing on their location and assure the proper location of these valves and appurtenances during the construction of the structures.

D. Flanged joints shall be made with Series 300, stainless steel bolts. All exposed

bolts shall be made with Series 300 stainless steel bolts.

E. Prior to assembly of split couplings, thoroughly clean the grooves as well as other parts. The ends of the pipes and outside of the gaskets shall be moderately coated with petroleum jelly, cup grease, soft soap or graphite paste, and the gasket shall be slipped over one pipe end. After the other pipe has been brought to the correct position, center the gasket properly over the pipe ends with the lips against the pipes. The housing sections then shall be placed. After the bolts have been inserted, tighten the nuts until the housing sections are firmly in contact, metal-to-metal, without excessive bolt tension.

F. Prior to the installation of sleeve-type couplings, thoroughly clean the pipe ends

for a distance of 8". Soapy water may be used as a gasket lubricant. A follower and gasket, in that order, shall be slipped over each pipe to a distance of about 6" from the end, and the middle ring shall be placed on the already laid pipe end until it is properly centered over the joint. Insert the other pipe end into the middle ring and bring to proper position in relation to the pipe already laid. The gaskets and fol-lowers shall then be pressed evenly and firmly into the middle ring flaires. After the bolts have been inserted and all nuts have been made up finger-tight, uni-formly tighten diametrically opposite nuts progressively all around the joint, prefera-bly by use of a torque wrench of the appropriate size and torque for the bolts.

G. Carefully inspect each valve, open it wide and then tightly close it and test the

various nuts and bolts for tightness. Special care shall be taken to prevent any foreign matter from becoming lodged in the valve seat. Gate valves, unless shown otherwise, shall be set with their stems vertically above the centerline of the pipe. Remove and replace any valve that does not operate correctly.

H. Carefully center valve boxes over the operating nuts of the valves so as to permit a

valve wrench or key to be fitted easily to the operating nut. Valve boxes shall be set to conform to the level of the finished surface and held in position by a ring of con-crete placed under the support flange as shown in Section 3, Utility Detail Drawings. The valve box shall not transmit surface loads to the pipe or valve. Exercise care to prevent earth and other material from entering the valve box.



Any valve box which is out of alignment or whose top does not conform to the fin-ished ground surface shall be dug and reset. Before final acceptance of the work, adjust all valve boxes to finish grade. Valve extension stems or risers shall not be used.




SECTION 333000 – SANITARY SEWER UTILITY PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipe and fittings. 2. Nonpressure transition couplings.

B. RELATED WORK

1. Excavation, Trench Widths, Pipe Bedding, Backfill: Section 31 20 00, Earth Moving.

2. Specification section 31 20 05, Trenching.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. PVC: Polyvinylchloride Pipe




A. Do not store plastic pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight.

B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.


A. Interruption of Existing Sanitary Sewer Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:

SANITARY SEWER UTILITY PIPING 333000 - 1


1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of service without Owner’s written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. PVC Gravity Sewer Piping:

1. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 679, SDR-35 PVC gravity sewer pipe with bell-and-spigot ends and with integral ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals for gasketed joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."


A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground sanitary sewer piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into account design considerations. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.

C. Install sanitary sewer cleanouts for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.

D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

E. When installing pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed, use pipe-jacking process of microtunneling.

F. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following:

1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow. 2. Install PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668.



3.3 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following: 1. Join PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for

elastomeric-seal joints or ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric-gasketed joints. 2. Join PVC profile gravity sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 for elastomeric-

seal joints or ASTM F 794 for gasketed joints.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect nonpressure, gravity-flow sanitary sewer piping to building's sanitary sewer lines as specified in Section 221323 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."

B. Pipe couplings, expansion joints, and deflection fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use nonpressure-type flexible couplings where required to join gravity-flow, nonpressure sewer piping unless otherwise indicated.

a. flexible couplings for same or minor difference OD pipes. b. increaser/reducer-pattern, flexible couplings for pipes with different OD. c. Ring-type flexible couplings for piping of different sizes where annular

space between smaller piping's OD and larger piping's ID permits installation.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Materials and their installation are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." Arrange for installation of green warning tape directly over piping and at outside edge of underground structures.

1. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of

underground structures.


A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.

1. Submit separate reports for each system inspection. 2. Defects requiring correction include the following:

a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures.

b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.



c. Damage: Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.

3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified.

4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.

B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for leaks and defects.

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. 2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction. 3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24

hours' advance notice. 4. Submit separate report for each test. 5. Gravity-Flow Sanitary Drainage Piping: Test according to requirements of

authorities having jurisdiction, UNI-B-6, and the following:

a. Exception: Piping with soil tight joints unless required by authorities having jurisdiction.

b. Option: Test plastic piping according to ASTM F 1417. c. Option: Test concrete piping according to ASTM C 924 (ASTM C 924M).

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping of dirt and superfluous materials. Flush with potable water.




SECTION 334100 - STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipe and fittings. 2. Nonpressure transition couplings. 3. Manholes. 4. Catch basins. 5. Stormwater inlets. 6. Stormwater outlet structures. 7. Pipe outlets.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. RCP: Reinforced Concrete Pipe



B. Shop Drawings:

1. Manholes: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, frames, and covers. 2. Catch basins and stormwater inlets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,

frames, covers, and grates.



A. Do not store plastic manholes, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight.

STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 1



C. Handle manholes according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.

D. Handle catch basins and stormwater inlets according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.


A. Interruption of Existing Storm Drainage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:



PART 2 - PRODUCTS




2.2 CONCRETE PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Reinforced-Concrete Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 76.

1. Bell-and-spigot ends Class III,

B. Designed Precast Concrete Manholes:

1. Description: ASTM C 913; designed according to ASTM C 890 for A-16 (AASHTO HS20-44), heavy-traffic, structural loading; of depth, shape, and dimensions indicated, with provision for sealant joints.

2. Ballast: Increase thickness of one or more precast concrete sections or add concrete to manhole as required to prevent flotation.

3. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990 (ASTM C 990M), bitumen or butyl rubber. 4. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), cast or fitted into

manhole walls, for each pipe connection. 5. Steps: Individual FRP steps, wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on

one step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch intervals.

6. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking HDPE rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and diameter matching manhole frame and cover, and of height required to



adjust manhole frame and cover to indicated elevation and slope. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer.

7. Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 6- to 12-inch total thickness, to match diameter of manhole frame and cover, and of height required to adjust manhole frame and cover to indicated elevation and slope.

C. Manhole Frames and Covers:

1. Description: Ferrous; 24-inch ID diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent to "STORM SEWER."

2. Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18 ductile iron unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 CONCRETE

A. General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318, ACI 350/350R (ACI 350M/350RM), and the following:

1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable.

B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 3000 psi (27.6 MPa) minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio.

1. Reinforcing Fabric: ASTM A 185/A 185M, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. 2. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (420 MPa) deformed steel.

C. Manhole Channels and Benches: Factory or field formed from concrete. Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi (27.6 MPa) minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio. Include channels and benches in manholes.

1. Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with height of vertical sides to three-fourths of pipe diameter. Form curved channels with smooth, uniform radius and slope.

a. Invert Slope: 0.10 feet through manhole.

2. Benches: Concrete, sloped to drain into channel.

a. Slope: percent.

D. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) minimum, with 0.58 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio.


2.4 CATCH BASINS



A. Standard Precast Concrete Catch Basins:

1. Description: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M), precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for sealant joints.

2. Base Section: 6-inch (150-mm) minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch (102-mm) minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and separate base slab or base section with integral floor.

3. Riser Sections: 4-inch (102-mm) minimum thickness, 48-inch (1200-mm) diameter, and lengths to provide depth indicated.

4. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings.

5. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990 (ASTM C 990M), bitumen or butyl rubber. 6. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and

shape matching catch basin frame and grate. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer.

7. Grade Rings: Include two or three reinforced-concrete rings, of 6- to 9-inch (150- to 225-mm) total thickness, that match 24-inch- (610-mm-) diameter frame and grate.

8. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting to base section.

2.5 STORMWATER INLETS

A. Curb Inlets: Made with vertical curb opening, of materials and dimensions according to utility standards.

B. Frames and Grates: Heavy duty, according to utility standards.

2.6 STORMWATER DETENTION STRUCTURES

A. Cast-in-Place Concrete, Stormwater Detention Structures: Constructed of reinforced-concrete bottom, walls, and top; designed according to ASTM C 890 for A-16 (AASHTO HS20-44), heavy-traffic, structural loading; of depth, shape, dimensions, and appurtenances indicated.

1. Ballast: Increase thickness of concrete as required to prevent flotation. 2. Grade Rings: Include two or three reinforced-concrete rings, of 6- to 9-inch total

thickness, that match 24-inch- (610-mm-) diameter frame and cover.

B. Frames and Grates: Heavy duty, according to utility standards

2.7 PIPE OUTLETS

A. Riprap Basins: Broken, irregularly sized and shaped, graded stone according to the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction “Orange Book”. 1. Average Size: Loose stone for riprap designated by size shall be Class 150 with

a D50 Mean Stone Size of 6”.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK



A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into account design considerations. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.


C. Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.




1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow. 2. Install PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668. 3. Install reinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 1479 and ACPA's

"Concrete Pipe Installation Manual."


A. Join gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following:

1. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasketed joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.

2. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with calked joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead and oakum calked joints.

3. Join hubless cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-coupling joints.

4. Join ductile-iron culvert piping according to AWWA C600 for push-on joints. 5. Join ductile-iron piping and special fittings according to AWWA C600 or

AWWA M41.



6. Join corrugated steel sewer piping according to ASTM A 798/A 798M. 7. Join corrugated aluminum sewer piping according to ASTM B 788/B 788M. 8. Join ABS sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 2751 for

elastomeric-seal joints. 9. Join corrugated PE piping according to ASTM D 3212 for push-on joints. 10. Join PVC cellular-core piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 891 for

solvent-cemented joints. 11. Join PVC corrugated sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 for elastomeric-

seal joints. 12. Join PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for


seal joints or ASTM F 794 for gasketed joints. 14. Join fiberglass sewer piping according to ASTM D 3839 for elastomeric-seal

joints. 15. Join nonreinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 14

(ASTM C 14M) and ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Installation Manual" for rubber-gasketed joints.

16. Join reinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Installation Manual" for rubber-gasketed joints.

17. Join dissimilar pipe materials with nonpressure-type flexible couplings.

3.4 MANHOLE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install manholes, complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated.

B. Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants according to ASTM C 891.

C. Where specific manhole construction is not indicated, follow manhole manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements. Set tops 3 inches above finished surface elsewhere unless otherwise indicated.

3.5 CATCH BASIN INSTALLATION

A. Construct catch basins to sizes and shapes indicated.

B. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated.

3.6 STORMWATER INLET AND OUTLET INSTALLATION

A. Construct inlet head walls, aprons, and sides of reinforced concrete, as indicated.

B. Construct riprap of broken stone, as indicated.

C. Install outlets that spill onto grade, anchored with concrete, where indicated.



D. Install outlets that spill onto grade, with flared end sections that match pipe, where indicated.

E. Construct energy dissipaters at outlets, as indicated.


A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318.

3.8 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect nonpressure, gravity-flow drainage piping in building's storm building drains specified in Section 221413 "Facility Storm Drainage Piping."





3.9 IDENTIFICATION

















hours' advance notice. 4. Submit separate report for each test. 5. Gravity-Flow Storm Drainage Piping: Test according to requirements of




3.11 CLEANING





SECTION 334100 - STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipe and fittings. 2. Nonpressure transition couplings. 3. Manholes. 4. Catch basins. 5. Stormwater inlets. 6. Stormwater outlet structures. 7. Pipe outlets.

B. RELATED WORK


2. Specification section 31 20 05, Trenching.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. RCP: Reinforced Concrete Pipe



B. Shop Drawings:

1. Manholes: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, frames, and covers. 2. Catch basins and stormwater inlets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,

frames, covers, and grates.





A. Do not store plastic manholes, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight.


C. Handle manholes according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.

D. Handle catch basins and stormwater inlets according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.


A. Interruption of Existing Storm Drainage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:



PART 2 - PRODUCTS




2.2 CONCRETE PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Reinforced-Concrete Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 76.

1. Bell-and-spigot ends Class III,

B. Designed Precast Concrete Manholes:

1. Description: ASTM C 913; designed according to ASTM C 890 for A-16 (AASHTO HS20-44), heavy-traffic, structural loading; of depth, shape, and dimensions indicated, with provision for sealant joints.

2. Ballast: Increase thickness of one or more precast concrete sections or add concrete to manhole as required to prevent flotation.

3. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990 (ASTM C 990M), bitumen or butyl rubber.



4. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe connection.

5. Steps: Individual FRP steps, wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on one step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch intervals.

6. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking HDPE rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and diameter matching manhole frame and cover, and of height required to adjust manhole frame and cover to indicated elevation and slope. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer.

7. Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 6- to 12-inch total thickness, to match diameter of manhole frame and cover, and of height required to adjust manhole frame and cover to indicated elevation and slope.

C. Manhole Frames and Covers:

1. Description: Ferrous; 24-inch ID diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent to "STORM SEWER."

2. Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18 ductile iron unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 CONCRETE

A. General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318, ACI 350/350R (ACI 350M/350RM), and the following:

1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable.

B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 3000 psi (27.6 MPa) minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio.


C. Manhole Channels and Benches: Factory or field formed from concrete. Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi (27.6 MPa) minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio. Include channels and benches in manholes.

1. Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with height of vertical sides to three-fourths of pipe diameter. Form curved channels with smooth, uniform radius and slope.

a. Invert Slope: 0.10 feet through manhole.

2. Benches: Concrete, sloped to drain into channel.

a. Slope: percent.



D. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) minimum, with 0.58 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio.


2.4 CATCH BASINS

A. Standard Precast Concrete Catch Basins:

1. Description: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M), precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for sealant joints.

2. Base Section: 6-inch (150-mm) minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch (102-mm) minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and separate base slab or base section with integral floor.

3. Riser Sections: 4-inch (102-mm) minimum thickness, 48-inch (1200-mm) diameter, and lengths to provide depth indicated.

4. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings.

5. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990 (ASTM C 990M), bitumen or butyl rubber. 6. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and

shape matching catch basin frame and grate. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer.

7. Grade Rings: Include two or three reinforced-concrete rings, of 6- to 9-inch (150- to 225-mm) total thickness, that match 24-inch- (610-mm-) diameter frame and grate.

8. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting to base section.

2.5 STORMWATER INLETS

A. Curb Inlets: Made with vertical curb opening, of materials and dimensions according to utility standards.

B. Frames and Grates: Heavy duty, according to utility standards.

2.6 STORMWATER DETENTION STRUCTURES

A. Cast-in-Place Concrete, Stormwater Detention Structures: Constructed of reinforced-concrete bottom, walls, and top; designed according to ASTM C 890 for A-16 (AASHTO HS20-44), heavy-traffic, structural loading; of depth, shape, dimensions, and appurtenances indicated.

1. Ballast: Increase thickness of concrete as required to prevent flotation. 2. Grade Rings: Include two or three reinforced-concrete rings, of 6- to 9-inch total

thickness, that match 24-inch- (610-mm-) diameter frame and cover.

B. Frames and Grates: Heavy duty, according to utility standards



2.7 PIPE OUTLETS

A. Riprap Basins: Broken, irregularly sized and shaped, graded stone according to the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction “Orange Book”. 1. Average Size: Loose stone for riprap designated by size shall be Class 150 with

a D50 Mean Stone Size of 6”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK



A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into account design considerations. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.


C. Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.




1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow. 2. Install PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668. 3. Install reinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 1479 and ACPA's

"Concrete Pipe Installation Manual."


A. Join gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following:



1. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasketed joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.

2. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with calked joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead and oakum calked joints.

3. Join hubless cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-coupling joints.

4. Join ductile-iron culvert piping according to AWWA C600 for push-on joints. 5. Join ductile-iron piping and special fittings according to AWWA C600 or

AWWA M41. 6. Join corrugated steel sewer piping according to ASTM A 798/A 798M. 7. Join corrugated aluminum sewer piping according to ASTM B 788/B 788M. 8. Join ABS sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 2751 for

elastomeric-seal joints. 9. Join corrugated PE piping according to ASTM D 3212 for push-on joints. 10. Join PVC cellular-core piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 891 for

solvent-cemented joints. 11. Join PVC corrugated sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 for elastomeric-

seal joints. 12. Join PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for


seal joints or ASTM F 794 for gasketed joints. 14. Join fiberglass sewer piping according to ASTM D 3839 for elastomeric-seal

joints. 15. Join nonreinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 14

(ASTM C 14M) and ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Installation Manual" for rubber-gasketed joints.

16. Join reinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Installation Manual" for rubber-gasketed joints.

17. Join dissimilar pipe materials with nonpressure-type flexible couplings.

3.4 MANHOLE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install manholes, complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated.

B. Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants according to ASTM C 891.

C. Where specific manhole construction is not indicated, follow manhole manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements. Set tops 3 inches above finished surface elsewhere unless otherwise indicated.

3.5 CATCH BASIN INSTALLATION

A. Construct catch basins to sizes and shapes indicated.

B. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated.



3.6 STORMWATER INLET AND OUTLET INSTALLATION

A. Construct inlet head walls, aprons, and sides of reinforced concrete, as indicated.

B. Construct riprap of broken stone, as indicated.

C. Install outlets that spill onto grade, anchored with concrete, where indicated.

D. Install outlets that spill onto grade, with flared end sections that match pipe, where indicated.

E. Construct energy dissipaters at outlets, as indicated.


A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318.

3.8 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect nonpressure, gravity-flow drainage piping in building's storm building drains specified in Section 221413 "Facility Storm Drainage Piping."





3.9 IDENTIFICATION

















hours' advance notice. 4. Submit separate report for each test. 5. Gravity-Flow Storm Drainage Piping: Test according to requirements of




3.11 CLEANING





SECTION 334416 -UTILITY TRENCH DRAINS

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Reference Specifications

1. Section 334100 Storm Utility Drainage Piping

1.2 DEFINITIONS




B. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit shop drawings for all specialty items. Submitted drawings shall show design criteria, all dimensions and details of reinforcement and joints.



A. General: Comply with Division 01 Product Requirements Sections.

B. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer's ordering instruction and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays.

C. Delivery: Deliver material in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

D. Storage and Protection: Store material protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer.


UTILITY TRENCH DRAINS 334416 - 1


1. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRECAST TRENCH DRAIN

A. Precast trench drain shall have the following components:

1. The precast trench shall be monolithic polyester polymer concrete manufactured from a composition of aggregate and polyester resin with the following material properties when tested as specified below:

Property ASTM Test Method Value

Compressive Strength C579 118.9 Mpa (17,250 psi) Min-

imum Bending Strength C580 27.7 Mpa (4,016 psi) Mini-

mum Tensile Strength C307 15.9 Mpa (2,310 psi) Mini-

mum Moisture Absorption C140 0.2% Maximum

Chemical Resistance C267 Pass

Freeze/Thaw w/o weight loss C666 1,600 Number of Cycles Minimum

B. Channels shall have the following attributes:

1. Customized pre-sloped radius bottom at 0.6%. 2. One meter (39.19”) or half meter (19.56”) length. 3. Nominal 155mm (6”) ouside width. 4. 100mm (4”) inside width. 5. Channels shall have tongue and groove joints. 6. All channels must have full length anchoring ribs. 7. Grate lock down slots shall have polyethylene vibration dampening inserts. 8. Sidewall Extensions shall:

a. Have six anchor bolts per meter (39.19”) section. b. Have tongue and groove joints c. Be composed of similar material and thickness as the channels

2.2 GRATING

A. Grating shall be H20 rated PolyDrain part number 2502 or approved equal and shall meet the requirements for ADA accessibility.



B. Grating shall be black epoxy-coated ductile iron meeting ASTM-A536 grade 80-55-06.

C. Grating shall fit into the channels without rocking.

D. Grating shall be locked to the channel using a zinc plated steel 5/16-18 UNC bolt and zinc plated steel toggle bar system with a bolt torque of 10 in/lb.

Class III,

2.3 CONCRETE

A. Concrete shall be Class 2 and contain not less than 590 pounds of cementitious material per cubic yard with an aggregate gradation of 1” x No. 4, and a 4” maximum slump.

2.4 REINFORCEMENT STEEL

A. Bar reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A 615 for Grade 60 Billet Steel Reinforcement with supplementary requirement S-1, or as otherwise shown.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION AND QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Install per the manufacturer’s instructions and as indicated on the plans.

3.2 TESTING

A. All trench drains shall be cleaned and flushed prior to testing.

B. CONTRACTOR will be solely responsible for the proper disposal of all water used in the flushing and testing process. Disposal of all water shall be in accordance with appropriate regulatory agency requirements.




SECTION 335100 – NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Materials and procedures for the construction of outside underground gas distribution system for natural gas.

B. RELATED WORK


2. Specification section 31 20 05, Trenching. 3. Specification section of interior piping: Section 23 11 23, Facility Natural-Gas

Piping.


A. Product data; submit product data on all materials to be used.


A. Test reports; provide certified test reports.


A. Coordinate with the SNJCC Project Manager and Utility Company (NV Energy) prior to any temporary shutdown of private or public natural-gas lines or meters.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PE PIPE

NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION PIPING 335100 - 1


A. All Polyethylene Pipe (PE) shall be manufactured according to ASTM D-2513 and shall be iron pipe sized, PE3408 high density pipe.

B. Minimum wall thickness shall conform to ASME B31.8. PE pipe is for underground use only. Polyethylene pipe shall be marked “GAS”. and it is not be used where gas pressures are above 100 psi (690 kPa) or with operating temperatures above 73 deg F.

C. PE Fittings shall be as per ASTM D2513; ASTM D3261, butt-fusion type.

D. Polyethylene pipe joints shall be heat fused, butt fusion type.

E. Anode-less Service-Line Risers shall be factory fabricated and leak tested.

1. Underground portion shall be PE pipe complying with ASTM D2513. 2. Aboveground portion shall have PE transition fittings. Outlet shall be threaded

flanged or suitable for welded connection. Include tracer wire connection and ultraviolet shield.

3. Stake supports with factory finish to match steel pipe casing or carrier pipe.

F. Transition Service-Line Risers shall be factory fabricated and leak tested. 1. Underground Portion shall be PE pipe complying with ASTM D2513, connected

to steel pipe complying with ASTM A53, Schedule 40, Type E or Type S, Grade B, with corrosion-protective coating for aboveground outlet.

2. Outlet shall be threaded or flanged or suitable for welded connection. Include factory-connected anode, tracer wire connection and ultraviolet shield.

3. Stake supports with factory finish to match steel pipe casing or carrier pipe. Bridging sleeve over mechanical coupling.

G. Plastic Mechanical Couplings, NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Capable of joining PE pipe to PE pipe. 1. PE body with molded-in, stainless steel support ring. 2. Buna-nitrile seals. 3. Acetal collets. 4. Electro-zinc-plated steel stiffener.

2.2 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Detectable warning tape shall be acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches (750 mm) deep; colored yellow.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.1 PREPARATION

A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off natural-gas to premises or piping section. Contractor shall coordinate all existing natural-gas shutdowns with the SNJCC Project Manager and NV-Energy.

B. Inspect natural-gas piping according to NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code to determine that natural-gas utilization devices are turned off in piping section affected.

C. Comply with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code requirements for prevention of accidental ignition.

3.2 NON-METALLIC PIPE INSTALLATION

A. Install pipe in trench in accordance with recommendations of the pipe manufacturer. Provide sufficient slack to allow for expansion and contraction.

B. Joints shall be fusion welds made in accordance with the recommendations of the polyethylene pipe manufacturer.

C. All offsets in piping shall be made with manufactured fittings. Bending of piping to form offsets shall not be permitted.

D. Connections between plastic pipe and metal pipe shall be made in accordance with recommendations of the pipe manufacturer.

E. Copper Tracer Wire consisting of No. 14 AWG solid, single conductor, with 30 mils HDPE insulation shall be installed in the trench with all piping to permit location of the pipe with electronic detectors. The wire shall taped to the pipe at intervals not exceeding twenty feet and at pipeline directional changes such as bends, 45’s and 90’s. Wire connections are to be made by stripping the insulation from the wire and soldering with rosin core solder. Solder joints shall be wrapped with rubber tape and electrical tape. The contractor shall install a five (5) pound anode at the end of each below ground wire for cathodic protection of the locating wire.

3.3 BUILDING SERVICE LINES

A. Before entering building, underground service line shall rise above grade close to building to permit possible gas leaks to vent themselves.

B. Install gas service lines to point of connection within approximately 5 feet (1500 mm) outside of buildings to which such service is to be connected and make connections thereto. The point of delivery is the meter set assembly.

C. Connect service lines to top of mains by service stop tee (weld x compression) welded to main.

D. The service lines shall be as short and as straight as practicable between the point of delivery and the gas main and shall not be bent or curved laterally unless necessary to



avoid obstructions or otherwise permitted. Service lines shall be laid with as few as joints as practicable using standard lengths of pipe. Polyethylene service lines shall not be installed aboveground except as permitted in ANSI B31.8.

E. Install gas service lines to point of connection within approximately 5 feet (1500 mm) outside of buildings to which such service is to be connected and make connections thereto. The point of delivery is the meter set assembly.

3.4 OUTDOOR PIPING INSATLLATION

A. Comply with ASTM D2774 & NFPA 54 the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.

B. Install underground, natural-gas piping buried at least 30 inches. Minimum cover depth is 30 inches and maintain a minimum 12” radial clearance from all other utilities.

C. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

3.5 PIPE SLEEVES

A. Provide sleeves where gas lines pass through retaining walls, foundation walls or floors. Split sleeves may be installed where existing lines pass thru new construction.

B. Pipe shall be continuous through sleeves. Set sleeves in place before concrete is poured. Seal between sleeve/core opening and the pipe with modular mechanical type link seal. All sleeves shall be vented.

3.6 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Install detectable warning tape directly above gas piping, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade, except 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

B. PIPE CLEANING 1. All pipe sections shall be blown down with 100 psi (690 kPa) air to remove all

sand, soil and debris. 2. Blow down procedure shall be done after system is complete, but before valves

are installed.

3.7 CATHODIC PROTECTION

A. Where soil resistivity is less than 4000 ohm-cm cathodic protection is required.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain earthquake valves.



3.9 TESTS

A. Piping System: Inspection, testing and purging shall be in accordance with NFPA 54 and ASME B31.8.

B. Cathodic Protection System: 1. Testing of Anodes: Prior to connecting anode lead wire to the piping, insert a

millimeter in the circuit and measure and record current output of each anode. When maximum current outputs, as set below, for the different sizes of anodes are exceeded, insert nickel chromium resistance wire in the circuit to reduce current output to maximum allowable for a given size anode. Resistance wire connections to anode lead wires shall be accomplished with silver solder and soldered joints wrapped with a minimum of three layers of high dielectric strength electrical tape. Cover with rubber all nickel chromium resistance wire. Maximum allowable current outputs for the different size anodes to allow for design life are as follows:

Weight Bare Anodes Allowable Current Output

5 lb (2.3 kg) Anode 10 Milliamperes

9 lb (4 kg) Anode 20 Milliamperes



2. Final Test: Final test of the cathodic protection system shall include measuring

pipe-to-soil potentials over the entire system. Make potential measurements with potentiometer voltmeter minimum internal resistance of 50,000 ohms per volt) and a copper/copper sulfate reference electrode placed at the finished grade level and directly over the pipe. Adequate number of measurements shall be taken over the extent of piping to insure that a minimum potential value of -0.85 volts exists over all new gas piping. Upon completion of testing, a report setting forth potential values acquired by location shall be submitted to the SNJCC Project Manager.




SECTION 335101 – GAS VALVES AND APPURTENANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Materials and procedures for the construction of outside underground gas distribution system for natural gas valves and appurtenances.

B. RELATED WORK


2. Specification section for interior piping: Section 23 11 23, Facility Natural Gas Piping.


A. Product data; submit product data on all materials to be used.


A. Test reports; provide certified test reports.


A. A nameplate bearing manufacturer’s name or trademark, including model number, shall be securely affixed in a conspicuous place on equipment. In addition, the model number shall be either cast integrally with equipment, stamped, or otherwise permanently marked on each item of equipment.

B. Coordinate with the SNJCC Project Manager and Utility Company (NV-Energy) prior to any temporary shutdown of private or public natural-gas lines or meters.

GAS VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 335101 - 1


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Joint Compound and Tape shall be suitable for natural-gas.

B. Welding filler metals shall comply with AWS D10.12 for appropriate wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.2 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES

A. All types of valves shall be accessible, labeled and specified for use for controlling multiple systems.

B. Metallic Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller shall comply with ASME B16.33, and have the following characteristics: 1. CWP Rating of 125 psi (862 kPa). 2. Threaded ends complying with ASME B1.20.1. 3. Dryseal threads on flare ends that comply with ASME B1.20.3. 4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for

valves 1 inch (25 mm) and smaller. 5. Valves 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) to NPS 2 (DN 50) shall have initials "WOG"

permanently marked on valve body.

C. PE Ball Valves shall comply with ASME B16.40. Valves in sizes 1/2 inch to 6 inches (15 mm to 150 mm) may be used with polyethylene distribution and service lines, in lieu of steel valves, for underground installation only. 1. CWP Rating: 80 psi (552 kPa) with an operating temperature of Minus 20 to plus

140 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 60 deg C).

2.3 EARTHQUAKE (SEISMIC) VALVES

A. Valves shall automatically stop gas flow when actuated by earth tremor and shall be single seated with manual reset. Do not provide manual shut-off attachments. 1. Valve shall comply with ASCE 25 and automatically shut bubble tight within five

seconds when subjected to a horizontal sinusoidal oscillation having a peak acceleration of 0.3 gravity with a period of 0.4 seconds. The valve shall not shut-off when subjected for five seconds to horizontal, sinusoidal oscillations having a peak acceleration of 0.4 gravity with a period of 0.1 second; a peak acceleration of 0.08 gravity with a period of 0.4 second or 1.0 second.

2. Valve should be rated for 125 psi 850 kPa) with flanged ends for pipe sizes above 2 inches (50 mm). Valves should have threaded ends for pipe sizes 2 inches (50 mm) and under.

3. Approvals: UL listed, State of California Standards for Earthquake Actuated Automatic Gas Shut-Off Systems.



2.4 VALVE BOXES

A. Valve Boxes shall be cast iron, two-section box. 1. Valve boxes and covers shall be traffic rated. 2. Top section shall include cover with "GAS" lettering. 3. Bottom section shall have a base to fit over valve and barrel a minimum of 5

inches (125 mm) in diameter.

B. Include tee-handle, steel operating wrench with socket end fitting valve nut or flat head, and with stem of length required to operate valve.

2.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS

A. Pressure regulators for individual service lines shall be capable of reducing distribution line pressure to pressures required for users. Ferrous bodies. Regulators should be: 1. Single stage and suitable for natural-gas, having a steel jacket and corrosion-

resistant components and elevation compensator. End Connections should be threaded for regulators NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for regulators NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

B. Pressure Regulators shall comply with ANSI Z21.80a/CSA 6.22a with a maximum inlet pressure of 5 psi (34.5 kPa).

2.6 SERVICE METERS

A. Meters shall comply with and ANSI B109.2.

B. Gas meters shall be furnished and installed by the contractor of type approved by SNJCC Project Manager.

C. Meters shall be pipe mounted. Meters shall be provided with over-pressure protection as specified in ASME B31.8.

D. Diaphragm-Type service meters shall comply with ANSI B109.1 and ANSI B109.2 with a maximum inlet pressure of 100 psi.

E. Service-Meter Bars shall be malleable- or cast iron frame for supporting service meter and include offset swivel pipes, meter nuts with o-ring seal, and factory- or field-installed dielectric unions. 1. Omit meter offset swivel pipes if service-meter bar dimensions match service-

meter connections.

2.7 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Dielectric Unions shall comply with ASSE 1079 and have a pressure rating of 125 psi (860 kPa) minimum at 180 deg F (82 deg C).

B. Dielectric Flanges shall comply with ASSE 1079 and have a pressure rating of 125 psi (860 kPa) minimum at 180 deg F (82 deg C).



C. Dielectric-Flange insulating kits shall have a pressure rating of 150 psi (1035 kPa).

2.8 ADVANCED METER TRANSMITTER

A. Provided with an advanced meter at the point of entry into each building served.

B. Advanced meters shall be capable of transmitting data at one hour intervals.

C. The advanced meters shall be pulse emitting type, 20 hertz maximum with dry contact, KYZ pulse output.

D. All advanced meters shall be connected to a central monitoring/reporting device with an Ethernet RJ45 female connection port. The owner will provide Ethernet cabling to the connection port to monitor the signals from the meters.

E. Provide 120v dedicated receptacles as necessary to power all metering equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off natural-gas to premises or piping section.

B. Inspect natural-gas piping according to NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code to determine that natural-gas utilization devices are turned off in piping section affected.

C. Comply with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code requirements for prevention of accidental ignition.

3.2 SERVICE-METER ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION

A. Install service-meter assemblies above ground.

B. Install metal shutoff valves upstream from service regulators. Shutoff valves are not required at second regulators if two regulators are installed in series.

C. Install strainer on inlet of service-pressure regulator and meter set.

D. Install service regulators mounted outside with vent outlet horizontal or facing down. Install screen in vent outlet if not integral with service regulator.

E. Install metal shutoff valves upstream from service meters. Install dielectric fittings downstream from service meters.

F. Install service meters downstream from pressure regulators.



3.3 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install underground valves with valve boxes.

B. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate for servicing and testing.

C. Install earthquake valves aboveground outside buildings according to listing.

D. Install anode for metallic valves in underground PE piping.

E. Do not install valves under pavement unless shown on drawings.

F. Clean valve interior before installation.

3.4 VALVE BOXES

A. Set cover flush with finished grade.

B. Protect all boxes against movement by a concrete slab at least 1.5 feet diameter by 8 inches deep.

C. All exposed portions of valve boxes shall be painted bright yellow.

